Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management / Ampol

Ampol

ald · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker ald
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2014 Annual Report · Ampol
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
A

l

d

e

r

m

o

r

e

G

r

o

u

p

P

L

C

A

n

n

u

a

l

r

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

a

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

4

Banking as it should be

Aldermore Group PLC 
Annual report and accounts 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Highlights of the year

Increased support for UK SMEs and homeowners

• Net loans to customers up by 42% to £4.8 billion (2013: £3.4 billion)

• Record level of annual organic origination of £2.4 billion (2013: £1.7 billion)

• Lending to SMEs up by 32% to £2.2 billion (2013: £1.7 billion)

• Residential Mortgages grew by 53% to £2.6 billion (2013: £1.7 billion)

Dynamic online savings franchise

• Customer deposits up by 29% to £4.5 billion (2013: £3.5 billion) 

• Excellent growth in SME deposits, up by 97% to £1.0 billion (2013: £0.5 billion)

Record levels of profitability

• Profit before tax up by 96% to £50.3 million (2013: £25.7 million)

• Excluding IPO costs, underlying profit before tax more than doubled to £56.3 million

• Return on equity1 increased to 15.1% (2013: 11.6%)

Diversified funding and strong capital base

• Issued £333 million of RMBS to further diversify funding base

• Successfully issued £75 million of Additional Tier 1 capital

• Total capital ratio of 14.8% (2013: 14.2%) and leverage ratio of 6.3% (2013: 5.3%)

Building a Bank to be proud of

• Delivering exceptional service, rated 4.6 out of 5 by our customers

• Number of customers up by 23%

• Received accreditation as ‘One to Watch’ in The Sunday Times ‘Best Companies to 

Work For’ annual survey

• Investing for the future, number of staff increased by 28% to 876

1  Excluding IPO costs of £6.0 million.

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportIn this report

Strategic report

Aldermore at a glance 
Chairman’s statement 
Chief Executive Officer’s statement 
Leveraging the business model 
Our strategy 
Our Key Performance Indicators 
Chief Financial Officer’s review 
Business review 

Asset Finance 
Invoice Finance 
SME Commercial Mortgages 
Residential Mortgages 
Savings 

Principal risks and uncertainties 
Our customers, people and communities 

Corporate governance

Corporate governance report 
Biographies of the Board 
Consolidated Directors’ report 
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 

Financial statements

2
4
6
8
10
11
12

18
22
26
30
34
38
42

45
52
54
57

Independent auditor’s report 
Consolidated financial statements 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 
The Company financial statements 
Notes to the Company financial statements 

58
59
63
121
124

For more information on our business visit
www.aldermore.co.uk

Twitter: @AldermoreBank

Facebook: AldermoreBank

LinkedIn: company/aldermore-bank-plc

YouTube: AldermoreBank

The consolidated financial statements of Aldermore Group PLC (‘the Group’) 
comprise of Aldermore Group PLC (‘the Company’) and its subsidiary undertakings, 
including Aldermore Bank PLC (‘the Bank’).

1

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic report 
 
 
 
 
Aldermore at a glance

Established in 2009, Aldermore is a SME-focused bank with 
a legacy-free, modern and scalable digital infrastructure.

Vision – “Banking as it should be”

• To be the strategically important bank for UK SMEs and homeowners

• DNA: Reliable, Expert, Dynamic, Straightforward

Targeted product offering

• Asset-backed lending for underserved customer segments

• Large, growing markets with attractive risk-adjusted returns

• Dynamic online deposit franchise forms funding core

Intermediary-led distribution complemented by direct

• 12 regional offices provide operational support

Consistent, robust credit risk management

• Modern IT systems allows focused use of expert underwriters

• Granular loan portfolio with strong credit KPIs

Proven track record of growth and profitability

• 98% of origination organically generated2

• Profit before tax almost doubled in 2014 to £50.3 million

Net loans3

1

Customer deposits4

1

1 Asset Finance 

22% 

2 Invoice Finance  4% 

3 SME Commercial
   Mortgages 

21% 

4 Residential
   Mortgages 

53% 

Total net loans2
£4.8bn

2
3

4

2

Total deposits3
£4.5bn

1 Retail deposits 

2 SME deposits 

77% 

23% 

2  From 2012 to 2014.

3 

Loans and advances to customers as at 31 December 2014.

4  Customers’ accounts as at 31 December 2014. SME deposits includes corporate deposits.

2

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Proven track record of delivery

Net loans (£bn)

Customer deposits (£bn)

4.8

3.4

4.5

3.5

2.1

1.2

2.2

1.4

Compound
Annual
Growth
Rate

+61%

Compound
Annual
Growth
Rate

+49%

2011

2012

2013

2014

2011

2012

2013

2014

Profit before tax (£m)

Return on equity5 (%)

50.3

25.7

15.1

11.6

-0.7

0.3

0.7

-0.5

2011

2012

2013

2014

2011

2012

2013

2014

5  Return on equity is calculated as profit after tax (excluding post tax IPO related costs) as a percentage of average shareholders’ funds.

3

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportChairman’s statement

“ Aldermore has the corporate governance, risk 
management and culture to operate a profitable 
and sustainable business in public markets over 
the long term.”

Glyn Jones 
Chairman

2014 highlights
• Further strengthening of the 
Board with the appointment 
of four new independent 
Non-Executive Directors

• A Corporate Governance Policy 

Framework in line with best 
practice standards set out in UK 
Corporate Governance Code

• Continued development of 
our customer-centric culture 
founded on a clearly defined 
approach to risk management 

4

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportAnother record year

When appointed to the Board in March 
2014, it was evident I was joining an 
energised business which had a refreshingly 
different approach to banking. It really is 
quite remarkable that a bank which started 
in the midst of the financial crisis has grown 
so significantly and is now an established 
business delivering long-term sustainable 
growth and strong shareholder returns. 
By offering our customers exceptional 
service, underpinned by strong values, 
Aldermore is performing strongly, with 
excellent organic growth and a proven track 
record of delivery. The Group generated 
profit before tax excluding IPO costs 
of £56.3 million, more than double the 
amount achieved in 2013.

The Group ended 2014 with a fully loaded 
CRD IV Common Equity Tier 1 capital 
ratio of 10.4 per cent, underlining our 
strong capital base and positioning the 
Group for long-term growth. Our liquidity 
position is also robust and in excess of 
regulatory requirements.

Governance

One of my primary goals since joining 
has been to further enhance the Group’s 
corporate governance as we prepare for life 
as a public entity.

In September, we announced Aldermore’s 
intention to float on the London Stock 
Exchange, however, the significant 
deterioration in global equity markets 
persuaded the Board to postpone the initial 
public offering (IPO). The number of IPOs 
that did not proceed during this period 
reinforces just how difficult the global 
markets were at the time. It is impossible to 
call the markets, but I am very proud of the 
management team for what was achieved, 
and the positive feedback that we received, 
against a backdrop of market turmoil. 
The excitement generated amongst a 
broad range of investors was clearly evident 
and so we remain confident that a listing on 
the London Stock Exchange is the natural 
next step in Aldermore’s evolution. 

Further strengthening our Board

This year saw a number of changes to 
our Board composition. When I joined, 
I began recruiting further Directors to 
build a Board capable of supporting the 
Group’s ambitions. During the course of 

the year four independent Non-Executive 
Directors joined the Board, Danuta Gray 
as the Senior Independent Director, 
John Hitchins as Chair of the Audit 
Committee, Cathy Turner as Chair of the 
Remuneration Committee and Peter Shaw, 
who will now take over as Chair of the Risk 
Committee with effect from 1 March 2015. 
Neil Cochrane also joined the Board as a 
Non-Executive Director representing our 
principal shareholder. 

I am delighted that we were able to 
attract such high calibre and experienced 
individuals who bring a wealth of business 
and public company experience. 

In December, John Callender decided to 
step down from his position on the Board 
with effect from 27 February 2015, having 
served as an independent Non-Executive 
Director since the Group was established. 
John has played a critical role at Aldermore, 
making invaluable contributions both as a 
member of the Board, as Chairman of the 
Audit and Risk Committee and latterly the 
Risk Committee and as Acting Chairman 
prior to my appointment. I would like to 
thank John for all of his hard work and wish 
him the very best for the future.

I would also like to thank Mark Stephens, 
Deputy CEO and Group Commercial 
Director, Paul Myers, Chief Operating 
Officer, and Steve Barry, Chief Risk Officer, 
who in line with best practice for listed 
entities stepped down from the Board in 
2014. Mark, Paul and Steve have been with 
Aldermore since the beginning and have 
made an enormous contribution to the 
effectiveness of the Board. They all remain 
key members of our Executive team. 

A clearly defined approach 
to risk management

As well as making changes to the 
Board composition we restructured our 
committees by splitting the Audit and Risk 
Committee into two separate entities. 

This was done to support the evolution 
of our Risk Management Framework. 
The development, implementation and 
maintenance of this framework is now 
overseen by the Risk Committee to ensure 
that its strategy, principles, policies and 
resources are aligned to the Group’s risk 
appetite and to regulatory and industry 
best practices. The Risk Committee also 
reviews the Group’s performance against 

risk appetites and the effectiveness of the 
Group’s risk management processes.

Underpinned by our culture

We continue to foster a culture centred 
on the customer which is informed by a 
keen awareness of risk. We encourage 
staff to take personal responsibility and 
ask managers to empower their teams. 
We have developed a management 
framework which supports a balanced and 
fair approach towards risk and reward.

What does this mean in practical terms? 
It means that we clearly communicate 
our risk appetite to all staff including 
measurable risk tolerances and the 
appropriate escalation procedures. It means 
that our people are assessed not only on 
what they achieve, but more importantly 
on how they achieve it. It means that 
incentives we offer to senior management 
are aligned with long-term outcomes. 
Crucially, it means that we deliver products 
and services to our customers which are 
transparent and meet their needs.

I am confident Aldermore has the  
corporate governance, risk management 
and culture to operate a profitable and 
sustainable business in public markets over  
the long term.

2015 and beyond

2015 will be an important year for the 
Group. The challenges facing the global 
economy look set to continue, particularly 
in the eurozone. Meanwhile the general 
election in May looks likely to be one of 
the most unpredictable in living memory. 
Yet amid this economic and political 
uncertainty, SMEs, homeowners and 
savers will continue to require financial 
services which meet their needs and we are 
committed to playing our part.

On behalf of the Board, I would like to 
thank our customers for their continued 
support and to extend my gratitude to 
our fantastic team for their hard work, 
dedication and loyalty to Aldermore. 

Glyn Jones
Chairman

5

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportChief Executive 
Officer’s statement

“ Our financial results for 2014 demonstrate our 
approach is working. During the year, we lent more 
than ever before to UK SMEs and homeowners.”

Phillip Monks 
Chief Executive Officer

2014 highlights
• Profit before tax excluding 

IPO costs more than doubled 
to £56.3 million

• Net loans to customers 

up by 42% to £4.8 billion

• Loans to SMEs up by 32% 

to £2.2 billion

• Loans to homeowners 

up by 53% to £2.6 billion

• Record loan origination 
of £2.4 billion, up 39%

• Customer deposits 

up by 29% to £4.5 billion

Net loans (£bn)

3.4

1.7

1.7

4.8

2.6

2.2

Loans to SMEs 

Loans to 
homeowners 

+42%

2013

2014

6

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportA different kind of bank

From the beginning, nearly six years 
ago, Aldermore set out to be different 
to Britain’s traditional high street lenders. 
Unconstrained by legacy systems and 
processes, our approach to serving 
our customers is modern, streamlined 
and designed to take the hassle out of 
banking. We understand that people are 
free to choose who they bank with and 
that their custom must be earned – not 
taken for granted. We are transparent 
about how we operate, our business 
model is straightforward and we have 
nothing to hide. We are agile, expert 
and entrepreneurial in our approach 
which allows us to empathise with our 
customers: Britain’s underserved Small 
and Medium-sized Enterprises (SMEs), 
homeowners and savers.

An approach that works

Our financial results for 2014 demonstrate 
our approach is working. During the 
year, we lent more than ever before to 
UK SMEs and homeowners with total 
loans up by 42 per cent to £4.8 billion. 
Record levels of organic origination 
of £2.4 billion, up 39 per cent on the 
previous year of £1.7 billion, drove 
this excellent growth in net lending. 
To support our lending businesses our 
online retail and SME deposits franchise 
continues to go from strength to strength. 
Customer deposits grew by 29 per cent 
to £4.5 billion with SME deposits up by 
97 per cent to £1 billion. We continued 
to diversify our funding in 2014 with our 
inaugural Residential Mortgage-Backed 
Securitisation (RMBS) in April, which 
was oversubscribed. 

We maintained our focus on managing 
costs and leveraging our operating model 
which saw our cost to income ratio fall 
by six per cent6 to 60 per cent and we 
continue on plan towards our target of less 
than 40 per cent by the end of 2017. 

The growth we have seen in our business 
has delivered strong and sustainable 
returns for our shareholders. Profit before 
tax excluding IPO costs of £6.0 million 
more than doubled to £56.3 million 
driving a return on equity of 15.1 per cent. 

To support our medium-term growth 
plans and to adopt a capital structure 
appropriate for a mature bank, we raised 

£75.1 million of additional capital through 
the issuance of Additional Tier 1 (AT1) 
securities in December 2014.

Our customers’ success 
is our success

Every day we see examples of how our 
support is helping to fuel the success of 
Britain’s SMEs, whether this is by enabling 
them to purchase equipment to fulfil new 
contracts, providing expertise to manage 
their cash flow or advancing them funds 
to expand their property portfolios. 

Our customers like what we are doing. 
We are one of the only banks to ask 
customers to rate and review our services 
online. In 2014, our average score was 
4.6 out of 5 and 96 per cent of customers 
who left us a review said they would 
recommend us. We often read reviews 
which describe our service as “banking as 
it should be”.

Building a long-term, 
sustainable business

In May 2015, we will celebrate the Group’s 
sixth anniversary. We have achieved a 
great deal since we were founded in 
2009. When I think back to those early 
days, our focus was on building sound 
and sustainable infrastructure, smart and 
efficient processes and customer-focused 
propositions. We simply wanted to lay 
the foundations of a profitable business 
while being reliable, expert, dynamic and 
straightforward in everything we do. That, 
in essence, is our DNA. 

Since then we have demonstrated that 
we have a profitable and straightforward 
business model that provides great 
service for our customers. In 2014, we 
made further significant investment in 
the Group’s controls and infrastructure, 
including configuring our digital 
platform so it is fully scalable to 
support future growth with moderate 
ongoing investment.

We also have a great team dedicated 
to executing our strategy, which was 
further bolstered in June 2014 with the 
appointment of Vicki Harris who joined 
as Group Strategy and Marketing Director. 
Our Board of Directors has been further 
strengthened in 2014 and I am grateful 
for their support in ensuring we build a 
sustainable business for the long term.

A year of highlights

In 2014, we restructured our mortgages 
businesses to better serve customers, 
expanded our customer Ratings & 
Reviews service, launched the Aldermore 
Community Team (ACT) and received 
accreditation as ‘One to Watch’ in the 
Sunday Times ‘Best Companies to Work 
For’ annual survey. We also continued 
to improve the services we provide to 
customers, with the launch of products 
including our unique Customised Fixed 
Rate Account which allows SMEs to 
decide – to the day – how long they 
want to deposit their money for. We also 
introduced ‘APP+’, a mobile application 
which enables Asset Finance introducers 
to price a deal or complete an application 
on the go, wherever they are and 
whenever is convenient. The Group won 
more industry awards than ever before – 
24 across our business lines and some for 
the fourth consecutive year. 

A strong track record set 
to continue

I am very proud of our achievements 
during 2014. It was another busy year for 
the Group which saw us achieve record 
results. I would like to thank all of our 
employees not only for their dedication 
but for the shared excitement and pride 
in what we are building at Aldermore. 
We measure our success by how we have 
helped customers grow their business, 
buy a property and save for the future. 
This is why people join us and it is what 
sets us apart from the competition and I 
am confident this strategy will continue 
to serve us well in 2015 and beyond. 

Phillip Monks
Chief Executive Officer

6  Excluding IPO related costs of £6.0 million. 

7

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportLeveraging the  
business model

Risk appetite

Customers

Distribution

Strong lending 
growth drivers

Prime credit 
quality 
customers 

Highly 
secured  
asset-backed 
lending 
with attractive 
risk-adjusted 
margins 

SMEs

Intermediated

Property investors

Homeowners

Direct

Savers

Online direct

Interest 
Income

Strong capital base

Expert underwriting and risk 
management

Modern, legacy-free systems

Scalable operating platform

Culture
Customer-centric; Risk aware

Lending

Asset Finance

Invoice Finance

SME Commercial 
Mortgages

Residential Mortgages

Our DNA is to be Reliable, Expert, 
Dynamic and Straightforward – these 
values inform everything we do forming 
the basis of our culture and brand.

We focus on prime credit quality 
customers across four lending lines 
chosen for their size, attractive risk 

adjusted returns and tangible asset 
security. We engage with our customers 
through intermediaries and directly.

We enjoy the advantage of modern, 
legacy-free systems which we use to 
support, where appropriate, our expert 
underwriters in making considered 

8

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportStrong lending 

growth drivers

Strong growth 
in net interest 
income

Cost base 
grows 
more slowly

Accelerating 
profit 
trajectory

Cost of 
funds

Net 
interest 
income

Costs

Profit

Funded by

Retail deposits

SME deposits

Wholesale funding

decisions rather than a “computer says 
no” approach. Our operating platform is 
scalable to allow for future growth.

We advance loans on which we earn 
income; these loans are funded via a mix 
of deposits and wholesale funding on 
which we pay interest. The difference is 

net interest income which grows with our 
loan book. Having invested upfront in our 
operating platform, our cost base grows 
more slowly than our net interest income 
driving an accelerating profit trajectory. 
This is what we refer to as “leveraging 
our business model”.

9

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportOur strategy

To deliver long-term sustainable growth and strong shareholder returns through 
offering simple financial products and solutions that are within our risk appetite 
and meet the needs of disenfranchised and underserved SMEs, homeowners 
and savers across both their business and personal lives.

Strategic objectives

1

Build strong market positions with distinctive customer propositions 
in chosen segments, while maintaining excellent asset quality

Aldermore focuses on specialist 
lending to SMEs and homeowners 
across four large lending segments 

which were deliberately targeted for 
their strong collateral characteristics, 

attractive risk-adjusted returns and 
growth potential.

2

Deliver long-term sustainable and efficient growth and generate 
strong shareholder returns

The Group aims to leverage its 
scalable, efficient and legacy-free 

operating model to grow revenues 
more quickly than its cost base 

and deliver long-term, sustainable 
profitability.

Maintain prudent capital, funding and liquidity positions

3

Our aim is to take a prudent approach 
towards maintaining a capital base 
that supports the Group’s growth 
aspirations and exceeds regulatory 

requirements. Our funding is 
expected to remain predominantly 
deposit-led. However, in addition 
we utilise wholesale sources such as 

the Bank of England’s Funding for 
Lending Scheme, our Residential 
Mortgage Backed Securitisation and 
a small amount of Tier II funding.

4

Continue to build an engaged and productive workforce aligned 
with the Aldermore culture

We recognise that for us to be 
successful in what we do, it is 
important to attract and retain a 

talented workforce. The Group aims 
to hire people who fit culturally 
and have the right competencies. 

We then empower managers with 
the tools and support needed to 
increase employee engagement.

10

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportOur Key Performance 
 Indicators

Net loans growth (£m) 

Cost/income ratio (%) 

Return on equity (%) 

1,427

1,317

90

900

66

60

2012

2013

2014

2012

2013

2014

15.1

11.6

0.7

2012

2013

2014

Definition
Absolute increase in loans and advances to customers net 
of impairment provisions.

Definition
Cost/income ratio is calculated as administrative expenses 
(excluding IPO related costs), depreciation and amortisation, 
as a percentage of operating income. 

Definition
Calculated as profit after tax (excluding post tax IPO related 
costs) as a percentage of average equity.

We aim to grow net loans whilst 
remaining within our clearly defined 
risk appetite. 

We aim to maintain net loan growth 
in line with current run rates. 

Our return on equity increased from 
11.6 per cent in 2013 to 15.1 per cent 
(excluding costs associated with the 
IPO) primarily as a result of increased 
profitability.

As a Group, we are successfully 
leveraging our operating model. 
Between 2012 and 2014, whilst our loan 
book grew at a compound annual rate 
of 53 per cent, the compound rate of 
increase in our cost base over the same 
period was only 33 per cent. As a result, 
cost/income ratio at the end of 2014, 
excluding IPO related costs, was 60 per 
cent compared to 90 per cent in 2012 
and 66 per cent in 2013. 

The Group is targeting a cost/income 
ratio of less than 40 per cent by the end 
of 2017.

Total capital ratio (%) 

Leverage ratio (%) 

Ratings and reviews 

14.2
2.1

12.1

14.8
1.7

2.7

10.4

CET1 ratio

Additional
Tier 1
capital ratio

Tier 2
capital ratio

128

1,688

1,904

No. of reviews

6.3

5.3

4.4

4.5

4.6

N/A

2012

2013

2014

NA

2012

2013

2014

2012

2013

2014

Definition
Fully loaded CRD IV Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital 
ratio is calculated as risk weighted assets as a percentage 
of CET1 capital. Fully loaded represents the adoption of 
all requirements of CRD IV once the transitional phase has 
elapsed. In Aldermore’s case, there is no difference between 
current CET1 ratio and fully loaded CET1 ratio.

Aldermore has levels of capital which 
are in excess of the requirements set by 
the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA). 
As at 31 December 2014 Aldermore’s 
fully loaded CRD IV CET1 Ratio was 
10.4 per cent and total capital ratio of 
14.8 per cent.

Definition
A ratio of Tier 1 Capital to total exposures, calculated in 
accordance with the requirements of CRD IV.

Definition
Our online Ratings & Reviews service enables customers 
to provide honest reviews of our products and services. 
When customers submit a review, we ask them to give 
us a rating out of 5 based on their experience with us.

Aldermore’s leverage ratio as at 
31 December 2014 was 6.3 per cent and 
exceeds the minimum requirement as 
proposed by the PRA.

Our Ratings & Reviews service was 
launched in 2012 for our personal 
savings, business savings and Invoice 
Finance customers. In 2014, we also 
extended the service to our Residential 
Mortgage customers. The feedback 
we receive is published unedited on 
our website and is used by us to help 
improve our services to customers. 

11

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportChief Financial Officer’s  
 review

Another record year for the Group

“ 2014 was another record year for Aldermore. As expected, as the business 
matures we are seeing our significant balance sheet growth driving an 
accelerating profit trajectory. We delivered record loan origination of 
£2.4 billion, net new lending in excess of £1.4 billion and almost doubled 
profit before tax to £50.3 million.” 

James Mack 
Chief Financial Officer

2014 highlights
• Net loans to customers 
up by 42% to £4.8 billion

• Customer deposits up 
by 29% to £4.5 billion

• Cost to income ratio7 down 
6pts to 60% (2013: 66%)

• Excluding IPO costs, profit before 
tax of £56.3 million is more than 
double 2013

• Return on equity7 increased 

to 15.1% (2013: 11.6%)

• Issued £333 million of RMBS 

to further diversify funding base

• Successfully issued £75 million 

of AT1 capital

• Strongly capitalised with 

total capital ratio of 14.8% 
and leverage ratio of 6.3%

Profit before tax (£m)

50.3

25.7

+96%

2013

2014

7  Excludes costs related to IPO of £6.0 million.

12

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportBalance sheet – key items

Loans and advances

Cash and near cash equivalents8

Investments

Other assets

Total assets

Customer deposits

RMBS

FLS

Tier 2 capital

Other liabilities

Total liabilities

Total equity

Key ratios

Net loan growth

Loans to deposits ratio

Liquid assets/deposits

Total capital ratio

2014 
£m

2013 
£m

% 
change

42

(54)

43

33

32

29

–

(21)

3

95

32

43

4,801.1

197.0

509.7

57.5

5,565.2

4,459.0

279.1

304.2

36.8

107.3

5,186.4

378.9

1,427

108%

16%

14.8%

3,373.8

430.4

355.7

43.1

4,203.0

3,464.0

–

383.1

35.6

55.0

3,937.6

265.4

1,317

97%

23%

14.2%

Assets exceed £5 billion

Diversified funding base 

In 2014, we increased our support to 
British SMEs and homeowners with 
a 42 per cent increase in net loans to 
£4.8 billion (2013: £3.4 billion). Net new 
lending of £1.4 billion was above both 
our guidance of around £1.3 billion and 
the prior year and was supported by 
record organic origination of £2.4 billion. 

We hold a liquid assets buffer in the 
form of cash and investments to mitigate 
liquidity risk. As at 31 December 2014, 
the ratio of liquid assets to deposits was 
16 per cent compared to 23 per cent 
for the prior year when the Group was 
holding additional liquidity in advance of 
issuing our inaugural RMBS.

Total assets exceeded £5 billion for the 
first time and were up by 32 per cent 
on the prior year driven by increased 
lending volumes.

Our lending activity is matched by 
a diversified funding base which 
is predominantly deposit-led with 
wholesale funding from RMBS, the UK 
Government’s Funding for Lending 
Scheme (FLS) and a small amount of 
Tier 2 debt securities.

We continued to attract savers with our 
‘good returns effortlessly’ proposition 
and deposits increased by 29 per cent 
over 2013 to £4.5 billion at the end of 
2014. We have driven very strong growth 
in SME deposits, up 97 per cent in 2014 
to over £1 billion. We’ve also recently 
launched corporate deposits to further 
diversify our future funding sources.

Our loans to deposits ratio has moved 
from 97 per cent at the end of 2013 
to 108 per cent at 31 December 2014 
as we have continued to diversify the 
wholesale element of our funding base. 
Looking forward, we expect to see this 
ratio to remain above 100 per cent 
reflecting the increased proportion of 
wholesale funding now used.

8 

Includes ‘Cash and balances at central banks’ and ‘Loans and advances to banks’.

In April 2014, we completed our 
inaugural RMBS issuing c.£333 million 
of securities priced at LIBOR +67bps. 
We were delighted at the level of investor 
interest in this transaction. 

We continue to use the FLS and 
Aldermore was the third biggest lender 
to UK SMEs under this scheme during 
the year. As at 31 December 2014, 
we had drawn £485 million of treasury 
bills under the FLS creating £304 million 
of on-balance sheet funding via 
repurchase transactions. 

The Tier 2 instrument is a historic 
instrument with a nominal value 
of £40 million issued in May 2012 
and a first call date in May 2017. 

As a result of the above, total liabilities 
grew at 32 per cent to £5.2 billion 
(2013: £3.9 billion).

13

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportChief Financial Officer’s  
 review continued

2014 
£m

227.8

(87.6)

140.2

18.6

6.2

165.0

(105.1)

(6.0)

(9.6)

50.3

(11.9)

38.4

3.4%

60%

23bps

15.1%

2013 
£m

156.4

(75.8)

80.6

16.0

11.7

108.3

(71.2)

–

(11.5)

25.7

–

25.7

3.0%

66%

42bps

11.6%

% 
change

46

16

74

16

(47)

52

48

–

(17)

96

–

50

0.4%

(6)%

(19)bps

3.5%

Other income includes other operating 
income and derivative income and was 
down over prior year at £6.2 million 
(2013: £11.7 million) due to adverse 
mark to market movements on hedging 
derivatives caused by financial markets 
volatility in the fourth quarter.

Record profitability

Income statement – key items

Interest income

Interest expense

Net interest income

Net fee income

Other income

Total operating income

Operating expenses

  of which IPO related costs

Impairment losses on loans and advances to customers

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit after tax

Key ratios

Net interest margin 

Cost/income ratio9

Cost of risk10

Return on equity9 (post tax)

Total equity

As at 31 December 2014, total equity was 
£378.9 million an increase of 43 per cent 
on the prior year due to the issue of 
£73.7 million of AT1 capital, net of costs, 
in December 2014 and an increase in 
retained earnings driven by the profit for 
the year.

Lending growth 
drives interest income

The 42 per cent growth in net lending 
delivered during the year has driven 
46 per cent growth in interest income 
to £227.8 million (2013: £156.4 million) 
with the gross interest margin remaining 
broadly constant at 5.57 per cent 
(2013: 5.76 per cent). We continued to 
diversify our funding mix with a higher 
proportion of SME deposits and the 
RMBS issuance in April. Both of these 
funding sources are cheaper than our 
average cost of funding and helped drive 
our cost of funding down to 2.14 per 
cent (2013: 2.79 per cent). As the RMBS 
9  Excludes costs related to IPO of £6.0 million.

10  Cost of risk is calculated as impairment losses as a percentage of average net loans.

14

was issued in April 2014, we have only 
experienced nine months of benefit and 
expect to accrue further benefits in 2015.

As a result, we delivered an increase in 
net interest income of 74 per cent to 
£140.2 million (2013: £80.6 million) whilst 
also driving a 0.4 per cent improvement 
in the net interest margin from 2.97 per 
cent in 2013 to 3.43 per cent for 2014.

Net fees and other income

Net fee income is predominantly 
driven by the Invoice Finance 
business which was stable in the year. 
The growth of 16 per cent during the 
year to £18.6 million (2013: £16.0 million) 
predominantly relates to other fee 
income. Other fee income contains 
commitment, arrangement, valuation 
and early redemption fees related to 
our mortgages business as well as 
fees associated with the Asset Finance 
business and the increase during the 
year was driven by growth in lending in 
these portfolios. 

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportLeveraging our scalable operating platform

Operating expenses were £105.1 million, an increase of 48 per cent on 2013 expenses of £71.2 million. Excluding costs related to 
the IPO of £6.0 million, underlying operating expenses were £99.1 million, an increase of 37 per cent over 2013.

Operating expenses

Other administrative expenses

Provisions

IPO related costs

Depreciation and amortisation

Total operating expenses

Operating expenses excluding IPO related costs

2014 
£m

91.6

3.6

6.0

3.9

105.1

99.1

2013 
£m

65.3

2.1

–

3.8

71.2

71.2

% 
change

40

71

–

2

48

39

Other administrative expenses have 
grown by 40 per cent during the year 
to £91.6 million (2013: £65.3 million). 
The rise was mainly due to an increase 
in staff costs, up by 29 per cent to 
£49.4 million (2013: £38.4 million). 
The number of employees and 
contractors increased by 28 per cent 
to 876 in 2014. The increase in costs 
represent a ‘step-change’ from the 
previous year as we invested further 
to build a sustainable and prudently 
managed business.

We particularly focused on the 
strengthening of central functions 
including risk, compliance and finance to 
ensure we retain the appropriate levels 
of oversight as the business continues to 
grow and mature, and to prepare for a 
potential listing. 

We have increased investment in 
information technology systems 
by 77 per cent to £8.3 million 
(2013: £4.7 million). Despite the increase, 
our ongoing investment needs in IT 
remains moderate. Included within 
administrative expenses was a charge 
of £1.6 million as we wrote off the 
investment in development of systems, 
related to Asset Finance, following a 
review of requirements.

Provisions predominantly reflect the 
levy for the UK Government’s Financial 
Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) 
which offers protection to individual 
deposit holders on amounts up to 
£85,000. The levy is linked to size of the 
Group’s savings business and has grown 
by 57 per cent in 2014 to £2.6 million 
(2013: £1.7 million).

During 2014, the Group undertook 
significant preparations for a listing on 
the London Stock Exchange and the 
related costs charged to the income 
statement in the year were £6.0 million 
(2013: £nil). Due to adverse stock market 
conditions following the announcement 
of our Intention to Float (ITF), the Group 
withdrew the offer on 15 October 2014. 

Depreciation and amortisation remained 
broadly consistent with the prior year at 
£3.9 million (2013: £3.8 million).

Reduced cost/income ratio

We continued to make good progress 
towards our target cost/income ratio of 
less than 40 per cent by the end of 2017 
with a 6 percentage point reduction over 
the year to 60 per cent (2013: 66 per 
cent) excluding IPO costs. 

Improved cost of risk

We continue to rigorously manage 
the credit portfolio. In addition to the 
actions taken in Invoice Finance, we 
also benefitted from a large recovery 
in the Asset Finance division and two 
large recoveries in our SME Commercial 
Mortgages business. As a result, 
impairment losses in 2014 were reduced 
to £9.6 million (2013: £11.5 million) 
equating to a cost of risk of 23bps 
(2013: 42bps). Excluding these three 
recoveries, the cost of risk for 2014 
was 33bps.

Underlying profit doubled

In 2014 we have generated profit 
before tax of £50.3 million, up by 96 per 
cent over 2013. Excluding IPO related 
costs, underlying profit before tax of 
£56.3 million is more than double that 
achieved in 2013.

15

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportChief Financial Officer’s  
 review continued

Strong performance across all divisions

Segmental result11

Asset Finance

Invoice Finance

SME Commercial Mortgages

Residential Mortgages

Central Functions

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit after tax

During 2014, we delivered improvements 
in profit before tax in each of our lending 
divisions. Our Asset Finance division 
almost doubled its segmental result to 
£25.5 million, while SME Commercial 
Mortgages division was up by 82 per 
cent to £34.0 million (2013: £18.7 million). 
The segmental result for Residential 
Mortgages more than doubled to 
£56.8 million (2013: £26.4 million). I am 
pleased to see the positive impact 
of actions that we took in our Invoice 
Finance division, with the segmental 
result up by 64 per cent at £5.4 million. 
Further details on financial performance 
of each business can be found on page 
18 to page 37 of this report.

2014 
£m

25.5

5.4

34.0

56.8

(71.3)

50.3

(11.9)

38.4

2013 
£m

12.9

3.3

18.7

26.4

(35.6)

25.7

–

25.7

% 
change

97

64

82

115

100

96

–

50

Driving strong returns

The record profit performance of the 
Group resulted in strongly improved 
returns with a return on equity, excluding 
IPO costs, of 15.1 per cent compared 
with 11.6 per cent for 2013. On a like for 
like basis, the improvement over 2013 
is closer to 6 per cent as, had 2013 not 
benefitted from brought forward tax 
losses and been taxed at 2014 rates, the 
2013 return would have be closer to 9 
per cent. 

2014 costs related to central functions 
were £71.3 million (2013: £35.6 million). 
These costs are mainly related to staff 
costs and office costs, as we invested 
in further strengthening risk, finance 
and compliance. Central functions 
include costs associated with our 
Savings and Treasury divisions which are 
responsible for raising finance on behalf 
of lending divisions and are managed 
centrally. Included within these central 
functions costs are staff related costs of 
£26.7 million, information technology 
related costs of £6.7 million, office 
costs of £3.8 million, depreciation 
and amortisation costs of £3.4 million, 
Financial Services Compensation 
Scheme costs of £2.6 million as well as 
£1.6 million relating to the write down 
of an intangible asset. As previously 
discussed, we also incurred £6.0 million 
costs related to the IPO.

The tax charge for 2014 was £11.9 million 
(2013: £nil) as the Group became a 
taxpayer for the first time during the 
year and represents an effective tax 
rate of 23.6 per cent (2013: 0 per 
cent). Profit after tax was £38.4 million 
(2013: £25.7 million), an increase of 50 
per cent over 2013.

11  Segmental result = Divisional profit before allocation of central costs and tax. Numbers may not exactly sum due to rounding.

16

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report2014 
£m

281.2

73.7

45.3

400.2

2013 
£m

242.1

–

41.9

284.0

2,702.0

1,993.0

10.4%

14.8%

6.3%

12.1%

14.2%

5.3%

% 
change

16

–

8

41

36

(1.7)%

0.6%

1.0%

Outlook

We are confident of continuing to build 
upon these excellent results. In 2015, we 
expect to again grow net loans in line 
with current run rates and make further 
progress towards our target of a cost/
income ratio of less than 40 per cent 
by the end of 2017.

Capital position

Capital

Common Equity Tier 1 capital

Additional Tier 1 capital

Tier 2 capital

Total capital

Risk Weighted Assets (RWA)

Key ratios

Fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio (%)

Total capital ratio

Leverage ratio12

The Group’s fully loaded CRD IV total 
capital ratio as at 31 December 2014 was 
14.8 per cent up from the prior year of 
14.2 per cent driven by retained earnings 
and AT1 capital. 

In December 2014, Aldermore issued 
£73.7 million, net of costs, of AT1 
perpetual notes with an associated 
coupon of 11.875 per cent and a first call 
date of April 2020. This is an important 
step in developing a CRD IV compliant 
capital structure appropriate for a 
mature bank and strengthens our overall 
capital position. 

The Group’s proforma leverage ratio was 
comfortably above the required minimum 
of 3 per cent at 6.3 per cent, up from 5.3 
per cent at the end of 2013 due to the 
issuance of AT1 securities.

12  A ratio of Tier 1 Capital to total exposures, as calculated by the Group in accordance with the requirements of Capital Requirements Directive (CRD IV).

17

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportAsset Finance

2014 highlights
• Net lending exceeded 

£1 billion, up by 45% on 2013

• Advanced over £2 billion in 

asset finance funding since 2009

• Record origination of 

£739.5 million, up 21% 
over 2013

• Net interest income up by 

60% to £36.9 million

• Cost of risk remains low 

at 30bps

• Segmental result up 
97% to £25.5 million

• New stocking finance and 
operating lease products

• Launched smartphone and 
tablet pricing application

13  Source: Finance & Leasing Association (Asset Finance).

18

Aldermore supports capital investment 
in business-critical assets via hire 
purchase and lease agreements. 
Leveraging our depth and breadth 
of expertise, we finance a wide array 
of assets encompassing plant and 
machinery, transportation, printing 
equipment, digital technologies and 
specialist large ticket items. This flexibility 
enables us to meet the needs of 
customers ranging in size from micro 
clients to plcs across key industries. 

In addition, we offer wholesale and block 
discounting facilities to smaller leasing 
companies and brokerages enabling 
them to extend credit directly to SMEs.

Market

Asset Finance loans originated in the 
UK were approximately £25 billion13 in 
2014. Around 80 per cent of market 
origination relates to ‘hard’ assets such 
as vehicles and plant and machinery 
for which there are strong secondary 
markets. A significant proportion of the 
remainder consists of ‘soft’ assets such 
as telephony, IT and printing equipment, 
which tend to have low or no secondary 
values. Our estimated market share 
based on loan originations for 2014 was 
3.0 per cent.

There are three distinct distribution 
channels within the Asset Finance 
market13: Direct, which is mostly 
dominated by large banks, accounted 
for around 50 per cent of the market, 
Vendor i.e. equipment manufacturers 
represented around 33 per cent, with the 
remainder being distributed by specialist 
commercial finance brokers.

Strategy

We aim to be our partners’ ‘funder of 
first choice’ by being easy to do business 
with, quick to respond and consistent in 
our credit decisions, giving direct access 
to our underwriters when required. 

We employ specialists across 
key industries including logistics, 
manufacturing, construction 
and agriculture with an in-depth 
understanding of our clients’ businesses 
and the assets they require. In addition, 
we have a dedicated structured 
products team who can consider larger 
ticket, more complex transactions and 
receivables financing.

Our modern digital technology allows 
us to use expert human underwriting 
in a targeted and cost-effective way. 
Where we are unable to auto-accept a 
proposal, our credit experts will work with 
our introducers to better understand the 
transaction enabling us to consider every 
transaction on its own merit.

Since inception, our focus had been 
predominantly on hard assets distributed 
via brokers. During 2014, we expanded 
the range of assets we finance to 
include printing equipment, digital 
technologies, renewables and a wide 
array of soft assets. Building on our 
strong track record with our introducers, 
we also extended our distribution focus 
to Vendors.

Portfolio by sector (%)

Portfolio by product type

1

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

1 Logistics (transport)  19% 
14% 
2 Manufacturing 
11% 
3 Construction 
10% 
4 Plant hire 
5 Wholesale
   and retail trade 
6 Financial
7% 
   intermediation 
7 Community activities  7% 
5% 
8 Agriculture 
2% 
9 Utilities 
12% 
10 Other 

13% 

2

3

1

6 7

5

4

3

1 Plant & machinery 
2 Commercial
   vehicles 
3 Receivables 
4 Cars – used 
5 Cars – new 
6 IT equipment 
7 Other 

37% 

30% 
11% 
7% 
5% 
2% 
8% 

2

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Recently, we wrote off an investment in 
development of a system following a 
review of requirements. The related costs 
were included within central expenses.

Our Asset Finance team increased from 
128 at the end of 2013 to 146 with a 
focus on front end sales-force to support 
our customers and introducers, and our 
credit team. We’re pleased to see a lot of 
interest from people within the industry 
who are attracted by our approach to 
improve the customers’ experience via 
human interaction rather than the credit 
scoring approach of some competitors.

Around 100 of our employees completed 
our ‘exceptional customer service training 
programme’ which we implemented 
during the year.

We’ve also extended a new internal 
technical training programme to our 
key introducers’ teams – free of charge 
– as we look to help develop the next 
generation of Asset Finance professionals 
across the industry. We received over 
100 external applications and excellent 
feedback for what we believe is a unique 
initiative within the industry.

Outlook

As business confidence increases and 
SMEs look to catch up on investment 
delayed since the financial crisis, we 
expect the asset finance market as a 
whole to grow. We look to build on 
our strong foundations to continue to 
diversify the distribution and asset mix of 
our growing business.

Distribution

Aldermore currently works with a 
network of around 600 introducers who 
are supported by a national network 
of Aldermore business development 
managers and our central service 
team. These introducers accounted for 
around 75 per cent of loans originated 
during the year. The remaining 25 per 
cent of origination was generated via 
vendors, dealers and, through our 
wholesale channel.

Financial performance

2014 was another excellent year for our 
Asset Finance business with our portfolio 
exceeding £1 billion for the first time. 
Net loans grew by 45 per cent, and at 
the end of 2014 were £1,044.3 million 
(2013: £720.2 million) with customer 
numbers14 up by 60 per cent to around 
33,000. Our Asset Finance division has 
now advanced over £2 billion to UK 
businesses since its inception in 2009.

We grew organic origination to 
£739.5 million, up 21 per cent over 
prior year of £609.8 million. In the 
fourth quarter we launched our stocking 
finance product, to finance equipment 
dealers’ inventory, which we expect to 
support growth of our vendor business in 
the future.

As expected, the enlarged portfolio 
generated significant growth in gross 
interest income, up 52 per cent to 
£56.7 million (2013: £37.4 million). 
Along with all of our lending lines, Asset 
Finance benefitted from a reduced cost 
of funding as we continue to diversify 
our funding sources. Net interest income 
grew by 60 per cent to £36.9 million 
(2013: £23.0 million) while net interest 
margin remained constant at 4.2 
per cent.

The cost of risk improved by 17bps to 
30bps (2013: 47bps) as it benefitted from 
a significant recovery.

Administrative expenses increased 
by 25 per cent to £11.9 million 
(2013: £9.5 million) as we continued to 
invest in the business. The segmental 
result almost doubled, growing at 97 per 
cent to £25.5 million (2013: £12.9 million).

Continued investment

We continued to invest in our digital 
capability and in the second half of 2014, 
launched our Asset Finance application 
for pricing and proposals, called APP+, 
making it easier for our introducers to 
get a quote for their clients anytime, 
anywhere and speeding up the credit 
approval process. Using a mobile or 
tablet, registered introducers can obtain 
a price, even on complicated quotes, 
within around 60 seconds.

Organic loan origination (£m) 

Net loans (£m)

739

610

1,044

720

+21%

+45%

2013

2014

2013

2014

Growing interest income (£m)

Declining cost of risk (bps)

56.7

47

37.4

30

+52%

-17bps

2013

2014

2013

2014

14  As measured by customer accounts

19

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportAsset Finance Case Study

“I wanted to make sure I 
was dealing with people 
who understood what I 
was trying to achieve. 
Aldermore and Matt made 
my life easy, so I could focus 
on servicing our clients 
while they sorted out my 
financial requirements.”

Steve Knee
Managing Director  
Cloudbass

Cloudbass – Investing for growth

The challenge…

With clients including Sky, BT, 
ITV Sport, the BBC and Manchester 
United, Cloudbass is one of Britain’s 
leading suppliers of outside 
broadcasting facilities and specialist 
crew. Recently, the company took 
advantage of the opportunity to 
expand its business when a key 
competitor exited the industry. 

20

Cloudbass was able to buy out its 
competitor’s contracts, which included 
the BBC’s Question Time programmes 
and Premier League commitments. 
In order to fulfil these new contracts, the 
company needed to purchase additional 
specialist broadcast kit, including outside 
broadcasting vehicles and cameras.

Steve Knee, Managing Director at 
Cloudbass, required funding for these 
purchases and called in the help of Matt 
Vaughan at Asset Finance Solutions. 
Matt, who is one of our brokers, 
understood our strong commitment to 
helping companies like Cloudbass fulfil 
their potential and knew that we had 
the expertise and appetite to consider 
a deal of this complexity and find the 
right solution.

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report“ Because our team of 

credit experts personally 
reviews every proposal 
we receive, we are able 
to gain an in -depth 
understanding of 
specialist businesses like 
Cloudbass whose specific 
requirements do not fall 
into the usual boxes.”

David Ray
Business Development Manager  
Aldermore

The solution…

When we initially reviewed the 
Cloudbass proposal, the rationale 
for the purchase was clear. 
Nevertheless the company required a 
large advance in relation to the size of 
the business for what are considered 
to be specialist assets. 

Working in collaboration with Matt 
Vaughan, our underwriters took the time 
to get to know and fully understand the 
business along with the wider sector in 
which Cloudbass operates. We also took 
comfort in the strong management team 
and their industry experience. 

In order to complement the Asset 
Finance solution provided, a facility 
through our Invoice Finance team was 
also included. The fact that Cloudbass 
needed to secure funding within a matter 
of weeks from winning the new contracts 
was not a problem for us. Due to working 
in close partnership with our introducer, 
we were able to deliver a solution within 
the required timescale.

21

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportInvoice Finance

2014 highlights
• Supporting UK SMEs with 
c.£1.4 billion of financing 
in 2014

• Segmental result up by 

64% to £5.4 million

• Driven significant operational 
and process improvements

• Cost of risk improved to 
174bps (2013: 290bps) 

• Specialist Finance team created

• Construction Finance 
proposition launched 

Awards
• Winner – Factor and Invoice 

Discounter of the Year (National 
Association of Commercial 
Finance Brokers (NACFB) 
Awards 2014) 

• Winner – Alternative Funder 

of the Year (South West 
Dealmakers Awards 2014)

• Winner – Alternative Funder 

of the Year (Central and 
East of England Dealmakers 
Awards 2014)

Invoice Finance is an important working 
capital tool for SMEs. Aldermore will 
usually lend up to 85 per cent of the 
value of approved outstanding invoices 
issued by the borrower to its customers. 
There are two main products, Factoring 
and Discounting; with the difference 
being that with the former, Aldermore 
often takes control of the borrower’s 
debt collection. 

Our customers are typically owner-
managed SMEs and we focus on 
key sectors including Manufacturing, 
Wholesale, Recruitment and Logistics.

Market

According to the Asset Based Finance 
Association (ABFA), gross advances 
for the first nine months of 2014 were 
around £19 billion and up by 12 per cent 
over the same period in 2013. However, 
the majority of this growth in pound 
terms was generated by companies with 
turnover greater than £50 million rather 
than our target customers who are at the 
smaller end of the turnover scale.

We estimate our market share to be 
around one per cent based on advances 
at the end of the third quarter of 2014.

Strategy

Invoice Finance currently represents 
around four per cent of our total lending 
portfolio and we expect it to continue to 
constitute a small part of our loan book. 

Given the short-term nature of this 
product, with the underlying invoices 
translated into cash within 60 days, our 
average gross lending is equivalent to 
providing around £1.4 billion of working 
capital finance to UK SMEs in 2014.

We employ specialist service teams 
in our target sectors that spend time 
understanding our clients’ business and 
design appropriate financing solutions. 
We offer simple and transparent solutions 
such as our ABC fixed fee Factoring 
product and look to provide a fast 
response with around 98 per cent of 
credit decisions made within 48 hours. 

Following a small number of fraud cases 
in 2013, we have improved the controls 
across risk, operations and sales to build 
a sustainable platform for the future. 

We are growing and upskilling our sales 
force and creating a trainee development 
plan to build the next generation of 
talent. From a product perspective, 
we will continue to innovate to meet 
our customers’ needs and will expand 
our Specialist Finance team, who focus 
on construction, trade and export 
finance initiatives. 

To date, we have generated strong 
growth in direct distribution and we plan 
ongoing investment in technology to 
enhance the customer experience and 
drive further growth from this channel. 

Distribution

Our intermediated and direct distribution 
channels are supported by local 
relationship managers based in our 12 
regional offices. We work with more than 
500 intermediary groups at a local and 
national level who originated around 71 
per cent of loans in 2014. 

Direct distribution has grown rapidly in 
recent years and now represents around 
29 per cent of origination. 

Portfolio by product type

Portfolio split by sector

1

2

1 Factoring 

51% 

2 Invoice
   discounting 

49% 

6

1

5

4

1 Manufacturing 

2 Wholesale 

3 Recruitment 

4 Logistics 

5 Other business
   activities 

2

6 Other 

3

36% 
17% 
15% 
14% 

12% 

6% 

22

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Administration expenses of £14.7 million 
(2013: £14.0 million) reflect the 
ongoing investment to improve the 
operating platform. 

We were pleased to see the result of 
our actions with cost of risk declining 
by 116bps to 174bps (2013: 290bps) 
in line with management expectations.

As a result, the segmental result 
improved by 64 per cent to £5.4 million.

Initiatives

In 2014, we set up a Specialist Finance 
team who launched a new Bad Debt 
Protection proposition, Construction 
Finance and Trade Finance solutions. 
We are also working with the Institute 
of Recruiters to continue to drive our 
proposition in this sector forward.

As well as working with existing 
intermediaries, we introduced a scheme 
to work with accounting firms to 
distribute Invoice Finance products to 
SMEs which has been well received.

Financial performance

Our key focus for 2014 was to build a 
stable platform for the future. Following a 
small number of fraud cases, more than 
would normally be expected in 2013, 
we have substantially enhanced 
credit and operational procedures, 
centralised operations, refocused 
the portfolio towards customers with 
smaller turnover and exited a number of 
accounts. As a result of these actions, we 
reduced the overall size of the portfolio 
by £31.4 million or 15 per cent to 
1
£180.6 million (2013: £212.0 million). 

Origination at £45.2 million 
(2013: £67.9 million) was also impacted 
by our focus on smaller clients. 

Gross interest income remained 
consistent with the prior year at 
£9.3 million (2013: £9.4 million) and net 
interest income increased by 18 per 
cent to £5.9 million (2013: £5.1 million) 
as we benefitted from the reduced cost 
of funds associated with our ongoing 
funding diversification strategy. The mix 
between Factoring, which attracts higher 
fees for running a client’s debtor ledger, 
and Discounting has stabilised, and 
as a result, fee income is also stable at 
£17.5 million (2013: £17.9 million). 

Continued investment

During 2014, we upgraded our core 
systems and are piloting mobile 
technology via the launch of a pricing 
app with a quick quote calculator.

We have also focused on recruitment 
and training as a key element of building 
a sustainable platform for the future. 
We have appointed new Directors of 
Risk, Operations and Sales, invested in 
a Sales Excellence programme targeted 
at employees with the potential to 
be a regional sales manager within 
twelve months and launched an online 
Career Academy.

We were delighted to win ‘Factor and 
Invoice Discounter of the Year – 2014’ 
from the National Association of 
Commercial Finance Brokers (NACFB). 
Even more pleasing are the unedited 
comments provided by our customers 
on our online ratings and review service 
where our service is rated 4.7 out of 5. 

Outlook

Having stabilised the platform, we look 
forward to continuing to develop our 
Invoice Finance business and providing 
ongoing working capital support to 
UK SMEs.

Net interest income (£m) 

Net revenue margin (%)

5.9

5.1

11.7

12.0

+18%

+0.3%

2013

2014

2013

2014

Segmental result (£m)

Declining cost of risk (bps)

5.4

290

3.3

174

+64%

-116bps

2013

2014

2013

2014

23

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportInvoice Finance Case Study

“From the beginning 

Aldermore took the time to 
learn about my business, 
and they have been 
proactive and flexible in 
supporting us ever since 
our initial meeting. This 
has eased our constraints 
and enabled us to focus on 
continuing our growth.”

Richard Haines
Managing Director
Mainstream Direct

Mainstream Direct – Taking time to understand the business

The challenge…

Mainstream Direct, a family-run direct 
mail production business based in 
Northampton, did not feel that it was 
getting the support it required from 
its existing invoice finance provider. 
Richard Haines, the Managing Director 
of the company, wanted a funder who 
would take the time to understand 
his business and work closely with 
the company to help it continue 
its growth. 

24

Richard mentioned this to his accountant, 
Gavin Parsons at Haines Watts, leading 
Gavin to direct him to Aldermore through 
our Accountancy Advice Scheme. 
The scheme, which was launched in 
2014, sees us reward customers that 
come to us via an accountant with a 
voucher to redeem against further 
accountancy services.

Explaining his decision to refer 
Mainstream Direct to us, Gavin at Haines 
Watts said “Aldermore has developed 
a reputation for making the extra 
effort to understand their customers’ 
needs and offer bespoke deals which 
fulfil their businesses’ requirements. 
Recommending Aldermore to 
Mainstream Direct was an easy decision.”

“ It’s great that we have been 

able to support a strong 
family business which has 
a real impact on the local 
community. Mainstream 
Direct has benefitted from 
coming to us through 
our Accountancy Advice 
Scheme, not only gaining a 
new Invoice Finance facility, 
but also enjoying additional 
accountancy services 
funded by Aldermore.”

Jacques Alard
Relationship Manager
Aldermore

The solution…
Early on in the relationship, our Invoice 
Finance team visited Richard and his 
team at their premises to discuss 
their requirements and to walk them 
through the interfactor transfer 
process from their existing provider 
to Aldermore. We also explained the 
dedicated support that was on offer 
throughout the term of the facility.

Given the company’s experience with 
its previous provider, it was important 
that we demonstrated that we would 
provide consistent support and always 
be on hand to assist. For instance, we 
were able to support the company with 
its credit control when it lost a member of 
staff responsible for processing invoices 
by providing guidance on managing 
the ledger and working through 
outstanding invoices.

As a result of our support, Mainstream 
Direct has been able to unlock cash 
to support its ambitious growth plans. 
The facility we provided has supported 
the company to expand its current 
services and diversify into new areas such 
as packaging for the printing industry.

25

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportSME Commercial Mortgages

2014 highlights
• Net lending up by 33% 

to £1.0 billion

• Organic origination 
of £421.9 million; 
up 45% over 2013

• Net interest income up by 

64% to £41.6 million

• Record segmental 

result of £34.0 million

Awards
• Winner – Development 

Lender of the Year (Bridging 
& Commercial Awards 2014)

• Highly Commended – 

Commercial Lender of the 
Year (Bridging & Commercial 
Awards 2014)

Integrated approach

Market

We offer a full range of mortgage 
products and whether a customer 
accesses us directly or via an 
intermediary, we aim to be easy to 
do business with and respond quickly. 

During 2014, we brought our two 
mortgage businesses together under 
a single management team, supported 
by a single IT platform, to provide an 
integrated approach to our customers. 
We have a private rental sector 
proposition across the whole spectrum 
of property investment, supported by 
expert teams.

SME Commercial Mortgages

Aldermore offers mortgages to cover the 
full lifecycle from property development 
through to purchase and refinancing as 
well as bridging loans.

Our SME Commercial Mortgages 
business focuses on mortgages for shops, 
warehouses, industrial units, offices 
and professional buy-to-let, where the 
customer has more than five properties or 
is a corporate entity. 

Our maximum loan size is £2 million on a 
single property or £5 million over multiple 
properties. The majority of the underlying 
assets are residential properties. 

We estimate15 that gross annual 
commercial mortgage origination is 
currently around £44 billion. Based on 
our 2014 origination of £421.9 million we 
estimate our market share to be around 
1.0 per cent.

Strategy

We look to build on our ability as one 
of the few lenders who can offer a full 
spectrum of products from vanilla buy-
to-let mortgages to complex Houses of 
Multiple Occupancy (HMO), commercial 
investments and commercial owner 
occupied. Having created a centre of 
excellence to support the private rental 
sector, we will continue to leverage our 
integrated approach to grow this part of 
the portfolio.

We work closely with our brokers to 
ensure we are easy to do business 
with and responsive, for more complex 
cases. We will continue to invest in our 
online portal technology to support this 
important channel. 

Looking forward, we also seek to actively 
develop our direct business which to date 
has grown as a result of repeat business 
and referrals.

Distribution

The portfolio is very granular, with 
the average loan size being £320,000. 
It is well secured with a maximum Loan to 
Value (LTV) of 75 per cent and an average 
indexed LTV ratio of 52 per cent.

91 per cent of SME Commercial 
Mortgages originated during 2014 were 
distributed through our broker panel of 
around 1,000 brokers. The remaining 9 
per cent were distributed directly.

Portfolio by product type

Portfolio by asset type

3

1

1 Professional buy-to-let
   mortgages 

50% 

2 SME commercial
   mortgages 

43% 

3 Property
   development 

7% 

6 7 1

5

4

3

15 

 Estimates based on De Montfort University mid-year 2014 
Commercial Property Lending Report.

2

2

26

1 Residential 

2 Shop  

3 Office  

4 Warehouse  

5 Property
   development 

6 Industrial unit  

7 Other  

52% 

18% 

11% 

7% 

7% 

3% 

2% 

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
We have retained our focus on credit 
quality as average loan size remains 
relatively small with a high proportion of 
tangible asset security. In addition, we 
benefitted from two large recoveries and 
this is reflected in the reduced cost of risk 
which at the end of 2014 was at 25bps 
(2013: 30bps).

The continued investment in the business 
is reflected in a 43 per cent increase 
in administrative expenses to £6.9 million 
(2013: £4.8 million).

Finally, the segmental result was 
£34.0 million (2013: £18.7 million), 
a record for this business.

Continued investment

In 2014, we recruited a specialist 
team to focus on residential property 
development, developing a new IT 
platform to support our proposition. 
We also launched a new Bridging 
Finance product for brokers. Unlike many 
bridging lenders we look to offer a long 
term mortgage at the same time as 
bridging finance. 

To support continued growth of the 
business, we have increased our sales 
force and also our back office operations. 
As a result our team has grown from 61 
to 84 during 2014.

Outlook

Improving business confidence and 
an increasing need for rental properties 
are expected to boost demand for 
commercial mortgages in the medium 
term. We will continue to support our 
customers’ financing needs, leveraging 
our modern technology to deliver 
excellent service.

Financial performance

We drove significant growth in 2014, 
with the SME Commercial Mortgages 
portfolio exceeding £1 billion for the 
first time. 

Driven by an increase in customers16 
from 2,400 to 3,200, we delivered 
growth in net lending of 33 per cent to 
£1,011.3 million (2013: £762.0 million). 
We saw the success of our private 
rental sector initiative with professional 
buy-to-let growing by 24 per cent 
and now forming 50 per cent of the 
overall portfolio. 

Organic origination of £421.9 million, 
increased by 45 per cent on the prior 
year (2013: £291.9 million). We have 
expanded our reach into the broker 
market with originations in 2014 up by 45 
per cent through this channel. 

Strong growth in net lending positively 
impacts our gross interest income, which 
is up by 41 per cent to £56.2 million while 
we have maintained our gross interest 
margin at 6.3 per cent (2013: 6.1 per 
cent). Funding costs across the Group 
have continued to decline with net 
interest margin improving to 4.7 per cent 
(2013: 3.9 per cent). Net interest income 
has grown by 64 per cent to £41.6 million 
(2013: £25.3 million). 

Organic loan origination (£m) 

Net loans (£m)

422

1,011

292

762

+45%

+33%

2013

2014

2013

2014

Growing interest income (£m)

Declining cost of risk (bps)

56.2

39.9

30

25

+41%

-5bps

2013

2014

2013

2014

16  As measured by customer accounts

27

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportSME Commercial Mortgages Case Study

“ Aldermore are different 

from many other lenders 
in the way that they 
view the client and their 
circumstances. They use 
common sense when it 
matters and are always 
looking at ways to ensure, 
where they can, that they 
get the deal done.”

Howard Thomas
Director
Howard Thomas Ltd

Howard Thomas – Getting the deal done at pace

The challenge…

When Howard Thomas’s 
clients approached him to find them a 
commercial mortgage for the purchase 
of a ground floor retail unit with 
upstairs residential accommodation in 
Derby, he knew that Aldermore would 
be able to help. 

28

Mr Thomas’s clients are seasoned 
property owners with commercial 
and residential properties as part of 
their portfolios. The husband of the 
investment duo already held commercial 
property under his name, and on 
this occasion the couple wanted to 
extend the wife’s residential portfolio 
to include a commercial property. 
The property in Derby represented the 
perfect opportunity.

The challenge with this application was 
the property had already been purchased 
at auction so needed a very quick 
completion. In fact, the timeline was so 
tight that the deal needed to be paid 
out within 13 working days from the date 
of the application in order to meet the 
auction house deadline.

Strategic report“ A deal like this would 

normally take between 
eight and twelve weeks 
from application to 
completion. To turn it 
around in thirteen days was 
a remarkable achievement 
by all involved and is the 
quickest I’ve ever seen a case 
go through for a commercial 
property purchase.”

Lisa Baker
Commercial Mortgage Manager
Aldermore

The solution…

To meet the purchase deadline, 
everything about the deal had to 
be prioritised. As soon as Mr Thomas 
submitted his clients’ application, 
we assessed it on the same day and 
sent back confirmation to Mr Thomas 
to proceed to valuation. The survey 
was booked for the following day.

We contacted the surveyor as soon as the 
valuation had taken place to ensure the 
case could be passed to our underwriters 
for approval as quickly as possible. 
Following our call to the surveyor, some 
reports were required which were needed 
as a condition of approval. Mr Thomas 
worked extremely quickly to obtain these 
reports which were satisfactory to clear 
the conditions by the time we received 
the valuation report.

Ultimately it was down to the great 
communication and speed of response 
from all parties, including Mr Thomas 
and his client, which enabled us to make 
an offer within four working days of the 
valuation instruction. Mr Thomas’s clients 
were able to complete their purchase 
a mere eight working days after the 
initial offer was accepted, meeting 
their deadline.

29

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportResidential Mortgages

Our Residential Mortgages business 
provides residential buy-to-let and 
owner-occupied mortgages with around 
62 per cent of the portfolio currently 
being buy-to-let. In the owner-occupied 
sector we target underserved prime 
customers including the self-employed, 
professionals and first time buyers.

Our owner-occupied business targets 
underserved prime customers who may 
fall outside the automated decisioning 
processes of some of our competitors, 
e.g. self-employed and first time buyers. 
We were also an early adopter of 
Government schemes such as the Help to 
Buy: mortgage guarantee scheme. 

2014 Highlights
• Net lending up by 53% 

to £2.6 billion

• Organic loan origination 

exceeds £1.1 billion 

• Net interest income 

doubled to £63.5 million

• Segmental result more than 
doubled to £56.8 million

• Cost of risk remains low at 6bps

Awards
• Winner – Best Specialist Lender 

(Financial Reporter Industry 
Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Specialist Lender 
(Legal & General Mortgage 
Club Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Specialist Lender 
(Mortgage Strategy Awards 
2014) – third consecutive year

We offer a full product range with 
fixed, variable and discounted rates 
and although our maximum loan size 
is £1 million, the average loan size is 
much smaller at around £137,000.

Market

The UK residential mortgage 
market is large, with 2014 gross 
originations including buy-to-let, 
of £206 billion17, giving Aldermore 
an estimated market share18 of 0.6 
per cent. Market originations are 
expected to grow17 as the demand for 
housing continues. 

Distribution through intermediaries 
remains a significant market feature19 
accounting for in excess of 50 per cent of 
total originations.

• Winner – Best Specialist Lender 

Strategy

(Mortgage Force Awards)

• Winner – Best Specialist Lender 

(Pink Service Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Lender 
Customer Service 
(What Mortgage Awards 2014)

We aim to get new customers into new 
homes and support small businesses 
including first time landlords. Our private 
rental sector team works across both 
residential and commercial segments 
providing a full suite of buy-to-let 
products and are able to deal with 
everything from an amateur landlord 
with one property to a professional 
investor with hundreds of properties. 
Within Residential Mortgages we focus 
on individuals where we can finance up to 
five properties. 

As in our other divisions, we aim to be 
easy to do business with, transparent 
and quick to respond. We benefit from 
our modern technology. In Residential 
Mortgages, our brokers are able to apply 
via an online portal and obtain a decision 
in principle within 90 seconds. This portal 
takes the application and links to external 
systems automatically completing basic 
identity, fraud and credit checks and 
builds an underwriting file highlighting 
any specific issues to our underwriters. 
This technology allows us to use targeted 
human underwriting in a cost-effective 
manner to make considered and 
consistent credit decisions.

Distribution

We enjoy strategic relationships with 
major UK distributors and in total 
work with around 12,000 brokers via 
our paperless bespoke broker portal. 
Around 88 per cent of 2014 originations 
were generated by brokers.

We have had a tremendous response 
to our direct to customer proposition 
and it now accounts for 12 per cent of 
all originations. Over time, we would 
expect the distribution mix between 
intermediated and direct to move 
towards market average levels.

Portfolio split by product type

Portfolio by customer type

1

2

1 Buy-to-let 

62% 

2 Owner-occupied  38% 

4 5

1

3

2

1 Employment 

2 Self-employed 

44% 

38% 

3 Director/partner  9% 

4 Retired 

5 Other 

4% 

5% 

17 

18 

19 

 Source: Council of Mortgage Lenders (CML) 
– December 2014.

 Market share calculation based on loan originations 
in 2014.

 Source: FSA – Mortgage Market Review: Distribution 
and Disclosure.

30

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial performance

2014 was a record year for our 
Residential Mortgages business with net 
loans up by 53 per cent to £2.6 billion 
(2013: £1.7 billion) driven by an increase 
in number of customers20 to 19,000 
(2013: 13,000). The buy-to-let portfolio 
grew by 45 per cent during the year, 
while the owner occupied portfolio grew 
by 106 per cent thereby becoming a 
larger proportion of the overall portfolio 
at the end of 2014. 

Originations exceeded £1.1 billion per 
annum for the first time, with Help to Buy 
mortgage guarantee scheme generating 
£189 million of loans in the year. 
Origination via brokers grew as we saw 
increased levels of repeat business from 
existing brokers. Direct originations were 
supported by the launch of our direct 
loyalty and retention programmes. 

This significant growth resulted in an 
increase in interest income of 60 per 
cent to £106.9 million with our gross 
interest margin remaining stable at 5.0 
per cent (2013: 5.1 per cent). Net interest 
income after funding costs doubled to 
£63.5 million (2013: £31.8 million) mainly 
driven by lower cost of funding, a feature 
across all our lending divisions.

We manage the credit quality of the 
portfolio carefully, with the average loan 
size remaining small at £139,000 and 
high asset security with indexed loan 
to value of 67 per cent. This control 
is reflected in the low cost of risk of 
6bps (2013: 10bps).

Administrative expenses at £9.6 million 
grew at a much lower rate than growth 
in operating income. The segmental 
result more than doubled to £56.8 million 
(2013: £26.4 million).

Continued investment

We continue to invest in our systems 
to ensure they allow our customers 
and brokers to access us easily and 
support our underwriters. During 2014, 
we invested in a Bridging portal for 
intermediary applications which will be 
fully deployed in 2015.

Our team grew from 97 at the end of 
2013 to 132 by the end of 2014 as we 
invested in increasing our operations and 
risk functions. 

We’re delighted with the positive 
feedback we’ve had from customers 
via our online rating and reviews 
service where we scored 4.7 out of 5.

Outlook

There remains a fundamental shortage 
of new housing in the UK and we look 
to support efforts to alleviate this issue. 
We see significant growth opportunities 
in the underserved market segments 
we target and buy-to-let, which 
should continue to drive growth in our 
Residential Mortgages portfolio in 2015.

Organic loan origination (£m) 

Net loans (£m)

1,165

740

2,565

1,680

+58%

+53%

2013

2014

2013

2014

Growing interest income (£m)

Declining cost of risk (bps)

106.9

66.7

10

+60%

6

-4bps

2013

2014

2013

2014

20  As measured by customer accounts

31

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportResidential Mortgages Case Study

“From the moment we approached Aldermore, we really 

felt like they cared about us. They were professional yet 
friendly and did everything in their power to help us secure 
the mortgage as promptly and efficiently as possible. 
Now that we are in our new home, our quality of life has 
improved greatly and it is perfect for our expanding family.”

Malcolm and Julia Wiggins
Homeowners

The challenge…

Mr and Mrs Wiggins, a married couple 
who are both self-employed, were 
looking for their ‘forever home’ ahead 
of the birth of their first grandchild. 
They wanted somewhere with space 
for their growing family and soon 
found the perfect property – a lovely 
country house surrounded by fields 
and wildlife in Wales.

32

In order to purchase the property, 
the couple submitted a joint mortgage 
application to a major high street lender. 
Despite having significant equity in 
their existing property, they were not 
offered the terms they had requested, a 
decision that the lender only informed 
them of after 14 weeks had passed. 
Mr and Mrs Wiggins then approached 
their existing mortgage lender who 
declined their application to port their 
current mortgage.

After their second mortgage application 
was turned down, Mr and Mrs Wiggins 
became extremely worried that they were 
in danger of losing the house. Given the 
time that had elapsed since their original 
offer on the property had been accepted, 
there was extreme pressure on the chain 
and the vendor was threatening to pull 
out of the sale.

“I’ve spoken to Mr and Mrs 
Wiggins since they moved 
and they are extremely 
happy in their new home 
– in fact they said moving 
there is the best thing 
they’ve ever done. I’m 
really pleased that we 
were able to step in at the 
last minute to help them 
complete their purchase.”

Gemma Donnelly
Mortgage Advisor
Aldermore

The solution…

Anxious to find a lender that would 
support them, Mr and Mrs Wiggins 
undertook an internet search and came 
across Aldermore. Fortunately we 
were able to quickly step in and do all 
within our power to help them meet 
their tight and demanding timeframe.

To better understand Mr and Mrs 
Wiggins’s needs, we spoke to them 
on the phone before they submitted 
their application. Although they were 
both self-employed, their requirements 
seemed straightforward. However, to 
ensure that we gave the best advice, we 
needed to discuss their repayment plans 
as they had applied for an interest only 
mortgage on a residential property.

Due to these initial discussions, we were 
able to make an offer extremely quickly 
upon receiving the full application 
– within less than a week and a half. 
Throughout the process, we stayed in 
regular phone contact with the couple, 
remaining especially conscious of their 
prior experiences with other lenders. 
Mr and Mrs Wiggins were able to 
successfully complete their purchase 
and have since written to thank us for 
our support.

33

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportSavings

2014 highlights
• Total deposits grew 

by 29% to £4.5 billion

• SME deposits now 
exceed £1 billion

• SME Customised Fixed Rate 
Account (CFRA) launched

• Rated 4.6 out of 5 
by our customers

Awards
• Four Time Winner – ISA 

Provider of the Year (Consumer 
Moneyfacts Awards 2011-14)

• Winner – Best Business Fixed 
Account Provider (Business 
Moneyfacts Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Bank Savings 

Provider (Moneyfacts 
Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Cash NISA 
(Online Personal Wealth 
Awards 2014 and 2013)

• Winner – Best Business Savings 

Account Provider (Savings 
Champion Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Bank Savings 

Provider (Your Money 
Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Online 

Savings Account Provider 
(Your Money Awards 2014)

• Winner – Best Online 
Cash ISA Provider 
(Your Money Awards 2014)

• Winner – Innovation in the 

SME Finance Sector (Business 
Moneyfacts Awards 2014)

21  SME deposits include corporate deposits

22 

 Source: Bank of England. UK deposit pool comprises 
outstanding sterling deposits and repos for individuals 
(retail) and non-financial businesses (SME/Corporate)

23  Based on deposits as at 31 December 2014

24  Based on accounts opened in 2014

34

A key pillar of our brand is total 
transparency. We publish unedited 
reviews on our website which allows us 
to react to customer feedback, improving 
our offering, and allows potential 
customers to see what other savers think 
of our products and services. In this, we 
believe we are unique in the UK banking 
sector. We don’t believe in products with 
gimmicks, teaser rates or introductory 
offers which the customer then has to 
keep an eye on. 

Having identified that SMEs’ savings 
needs were as underserved as their 
lending needs, we launched our 
SME offering in 2012. We see strong 
opportunities for growth in both the SME 
and Corporate deposit market which we 
recently entered. 

Distribution

Our distribution strategy is predominantly 
online with around 76 per cent of retail 
and almost all SME accounts opened via 
our website.

Aldermore’s dynamic online savings 
franchise anchors our funding base 
enabling us to support the financing 
needs of UK SMEs and homeowners. 

We offer a range of award-winning, 
straightforward saving products to both 
Retail and SME customers and have 
recently expanded into the corporate 
savings market. Products include retail 
fixed term, notice, easy access and cash 
ISAs as well as SME fixed term and easy 
access accounts.

Market

The UK savings market is large at around 
£1.7 trillion22 across both retail and 
SME/Corporate deposits and is steadily 
expanding. Aldermore has estimated 
market shares23 of around 0.3 per cent in 
retail deposits and 0.2 per cent in SME/
Corporate deposits leaving substantial 
scope for future expansion without the 
need to target large market shares.

Strategy

We believe that saving should be as 
straightforward and as rewarding as 
possible for our customers. 

For both retail and SME depositors, 
we aim to deliver exceptional service. 
Accounts can be opened and funded 
online within fifteen minutes as our 
modern IT systems and processes 
are able to link to external systems to 
complete key identity checks. We also 
offer phone and postal access for 
retail customers.

Deposits by customer type21

Retail deposits – distribution24

1

1

2

1 Retail deposit 

2 SME deposits 

77% 

23% 

2

1 Online 

2 Telephone/
   post 

76% 

24% 

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic report 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Growth

Product innovation

Ratings and reviews 

Our deposit business delivered 
another strong year of growth, with 
total deposits growing by 29 per cent 
to £4.5 billion (2013: £3.5 billion) and 
forming around 88 per cent of the 
Group’s total funding base (2013: 90 
per cent).

We now have almost 94,000 retail 
savers holding around 114,000 accounts 
(2013: 86,000 customers with 100,000 
accounts) with total retail deposits 
growing by 16 per cent to £3.4 billion 
(2013: £2.9 billion).

Within three years, SME deposits have 
surpassed £1 billion and are nearly 
double the balance at the end of 2013 
(£0.5 billion). SME customers increased 
to 11,000 (2013: 7,000) while number of 
accounts more than doubled to 14,500 
(2013: 7,000).

At the start of 2014, we launched our 
Customised Fixed Rate Account (CFRA) 
for SMEs, with our modern, flexible 
systems enabling us to develop and 
launch this product within three months. 
This innovative account allows SMEs to 
decide the exact term of their deposit 
ranging from 60 days to five years and 
a maturity date dial will provide the 
corresponding interest rate. Alternatively, 
a customer can select the interest 
rate they want to earn and our system 
will calculate the maturity required. 
We believe this is the only account of its 
kind in the SME market and in less than a 
year represents around 11 per cent of our 
SME deposit base. 

We believe that reviews are an excellent 
way of providing a great customer 
experience for both existing and future 
customers and we are delighted that our 
customers currently rate us at 4.6 out 
of 5.

We take feedback seriously and 
take action to improve our services 
and products: 

•  during 2014 we changed our 0845 

telephone number to a 0345 number 
so that calls would be free from mobile 
phones as well as landlines;

•  we simplified our payments processes 
to make faster payment options more 
obvious; and

•  a customer can now open a 

subsequent account in two clicks as 
we link automatically to data from the 
original account rather than making the 
customer repeat the full process.

Outlook

We will continue to provide 
transparent, straightforward and 
innovative products which meet the 
needs of both our Retail and SME 
depositors supported by exceptional 
customer service. During 2015, 
we also look to extend further into 
the corporate savings market.

Customer deposits25 (£bn)

4.5

1.0

3.4

3.5

0.5

2.9

2013

2014

Retail
deposits

SME deposits

+29%

Illustration purposes only. 
For more information on the Customised Fixed Rate Account please visit http://www.aldermore.co.uk

25  SME deposits include corporate deposits. Numbers may not exactly sum due to rounding.

35

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportSavings Case Study

“Dealing with Aldermore was 
really simple. Their website 
was easy to use and compared 
to other banks their account 
opening process was extremely 
straightforward. What’s more, 
when I needed to call them, 
they answered the phone 
straight away and didn’t leave 
me hanging on the line.”

Steve Edwards
Managing Director 
Silvertel

Silvertel – Allowing customers to choose their own terms

The challenge…

Silvertel, which is based in Newport in 
Wales, specialises in developing and 
supplying electronic components to 
an extensive customer base including 
many leading technology, telecoms 
and security companies around the 
world. The business was founded by 
electronics graduate Steve Edwards 
in 1997.

36

Steve keeps spare cash in reserve in 
case of an emergency. He cannot lock 
this money away for long periods of 
time since he never knows when the 
company may need to access it at short 
notice, however there is the flexibility to 
lock it away for a few months at a time. 
Steve was disappointed with the rate he 
was getting from the company’s main 
high street bank so began looking at 
other options. 

Steve had not previously heard of 
Aldermore and came across us through 
a search on a price comparison website. 
He also read a number of independent 
reviews of Aldermore online which talked 
positively about us. Intrigued by what he 
had seen, Steve was persuaded to come 
to us for his company’s savings needs.

“We pride ourselves on our 
simple, straightforward 
products and processes and 
the great value returns that 
we offer. All of our savings 
accounts can be set up and 
funded online in fifteen 
minutes, meaning that SMEs 
like Silvertel can open an 
account with us effortlessly 
without leaving the office.”

Richard Taylor
Head of Products, Savings
Aldermore

The solution…

Steve decided that our Customised 
Fixed Rate Account (CFRA) was 
right for Silvertel. With the account, 
customers do not have to adhere to 
a maturity date chosen by us; instead 
they can select any date between 60 
days to five years, with the interest 
rate increasing the longer they leave 
their money with us. We believe it is 
the only account of its kind for SMEs.

The ability to select a maturity date has 
proved useful for Silvertel. It allows Steve 
to fix the term for a few months at a time 
before rolling the funds over for another 
fixed term – something he has done 
several times since opening the account. 
In fact, he was so impressed with his 
experience of Aldermore that he has 
since opened a personal savings account 
with us too.

We developed the CFRA after speaking 
to hundreds of SMEs who told us that, as 
well as good returns and straightforward 
processes, they require flexibility from 
their savings accounts. The account is 
one example of how we put customers at 
the heart of what we do.

37

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportPrincipal risks and uncertainties 

This section describes 
the principal risks and 
uncertainties to which 
the Group is exposed 
along with the Group’s 
approach to mitigating 
these risks. 
All of the risks described within this 
section are classified as principal risks 
within the Group’s Risk Management 
Framework and are considered to be 
important to the future development, 
performance and position of the Group. 
However, there is a sub set of these 
principal risks which are deemed to be 
more pertinent given the Group’s current 
circumstances. These particular risks 
reflect the Group’s development and 
growth strategy:

•  credit risk: in particular, given the 

unseasoned nature of the book, there 
is a future risk that the underlying credit 
impairment loss trends differ from the 
Group’s current expectations;

•  capital risk: as the Group continues to 
follow a growth strategy, there is a risk 
that the Group has insufficient capital 
to cover regulatory requirements; 

•  operational risk: given the growth 
strategy, there is a risk that the 
operational infrastructure is 
inadequate to support the Group. 
The Group currently has a significant 
transformation and change agenda 
which includes the concurrent running 
of numerous projects. These projects 
include IT based projects designed to 
ensure that the Group’s infrastructure 
remains modern and scalable, to 
support the Group’s growth strategy. 

Therefore the Group is exposed to 
execution risk on these projects. 
During 2014, an element of this risk 
crystallised resulting in a £1.6 million 
write off of an intangible asset.

Each of these risks, along with how the 
Group mitigates them, is discussed in 
detail below. 

The Group’s Risk Management 
Framework is designed to ensure that 
risks are identified, assessed, managed 
and monitored effectively. Group Risk 
provides oversight of the risk profile. 
Each risk has a defined risk appetite 
which is controlled through documented 
policies and regular reporting, and is 
monitored and overseen by one or 
more committees as part of the Group’s 
governance process. 

Further detail regarding the Risk 
Management Framework is provided 
in Note 40 and specific detail on 
capital management is provided in 
Note 41. Further details regarding the 
management of strategic risk, operational 
risk and conduct risk are presented below. 

Current risks

Economy
The economic environment is relatively 
stable within the UK, with growth across 
most sectors and contained inflationary 
risks. However, international geopolitical 
risks are increasing in the EU, Russia and 
China which may adversely affect the UK 
and these developments are being closely 
monitored. Deflation and contraction, 
especially in the EU economies, could act 
as a drag on the UK, and central London 
property price softening could broaden 
out. The Group is not exposed to any 
direct risks of a possible Greek exit from 
the eurozone. 

Recent deflationary pressures, 
exacerbated by reducing oil prices have 
reduced and flattened the yield curve and 
have extended the timing for near-term 
interest rate increases. 

The Group has a material proportion of 
mortgage assets which are sensitive to 
interest rate rises, therefore the reduced 
interest rates in the near term will lower 
the risk on affordability pressures linked to 
rising interest rates. 

Oil & gas sector
Falling oil prices over a prolonged period 
are likely to affect property and asset 
values for companies involved in the oil 
industry, especially for property values 
in Aberdeen, Scotland. The Group has 
a very modest exposure to this risk and 
there are no immediate signs of stress 
apparent, but the position is being 
closely monitored.

Cyber risk
As the Group continues to grow, with a 
number of projects running, operational 
risk will continue to remain an area of 
focus. Operational risks such as cyber 
risk and IT security are reviewed at Board 
level as well as at management level 
committees. Cyber risk is a high profile 
issue for banks and cyber risk threats are 
expected to increase over time for the 
industry. The Group’s current position in 
managing cyber risks has been reviewed 
during 2014 and control enhancements 
made. Further investment and actions are 
planned for 2015 to increase protection 
against IT security and IT resilience risks.

The following table details all of the risks 
classified as principal risks within the 
Group’s Risk Management Framework.

Strategic risk

Definition
The risk which can affect the 
Group’s ability to achieve 
its corporate and strategic 
objectives.

Mitigation of risk
Strategic risk is particularly important as the Group continues its growth strategy. 

The Group seeks to mitigate strategic risk by focusing on a sustainable business model which is 
aligned to the Group’s business strategy. 

Strategic risk can arise as a result of both internal and external factors. The Group seeks to identify 
and mitigate the individual components of strategic risk through the application of the Risk 
Management Framework. Further details of strategic risk are provided below. 

38

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportCredit risk

Definition
The risk of financial loss 
arising from a borrower 
failing to meet their 
financial obligations to the 
Group in accordance with 
agreed terms.

Capital risk

Definition
The risk that the Group has 
insufficient capital to cover 
regulatory requirements 
and growth plans.

Liquidity risk

Definition
The risk that the Group 
is not able to meet its 
financial obligations as they 
fall due, or can do so only 
at excessive cost.

Interest rate risk

Definition
The risk of financial loss 
through un-hedged or 
mismatched asset and 
liability positions sensitive 
to changes in interest rates.

Mitigation of risk
The Group seeks to mitigate credit risk by focusing on business sectors where it has specific expertise and 
through limiting concentration of exposures of larger loans and or geographical and business sectors, 
especially where there are higher levels of risk. The Group also seeks to obtain security cover, and where 
appropriate, personal guarantees from borrowers.

The Group uses detailed lending policies tailored to each business area which outline the approach 
to lending, underwriting criteria, credit mandates, concentration limits and product terms. The Group 
maintains a dynamic approach to credit management. Its lending policies and performance against risk 
appetites are regularly reviewed and the Group will take necessary steps if specific issues are identified or 
expected to deteriorate, due to economic, sector or borrower specific weaknesses.

External rating agency ratings for borrowers are not typically available in the specialist segments in the retail 
and SME markets in which the Group operates. Credit risk is, instead, assessed through a combination of 
due diligence, reviewing credit reference agency reports, reviewing financial information, credit scores and 
the use of underwriting expertise.

As a growing business with a relatively unseasoned loan book, there remains a risk that the level of credit risk 
incurred to date is not reflective of the future credit risk which may be incurred as the loan book matures. 

The Group actively manages credit risk as described above and is cognisant of the relatively unseasoned 
nature of the book as it reviews credit performance. See page 104 for further analysis.

Mitigation of risk
The Group undertakes certain activities to manage and mitigate capital risk. The primary mechanism 
to ensure that sufficient capital is held is through regulating the volume of asset origination. In 
addition, capital risk management activities include monthly capital forecasting over a period of 12-
18 months designed to provide a forward view on capital allocation and excess regulatory capital. 
Furthermore, stress testing and sensitivity analysis is performed to provide information on the Group’s 
capital position. Capital requirements under stressed conditions are considered as part of the Group’s 
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process.

In December 2014, the Group has raised further capital in the form of Additional Tier 1 securities 
to enable it to continue its growth strategy. There will continue to be a keen focus on capital 
management to ensure that the Group has a capital structure which is both compliant with the 
relevant regulatory requirements and also supports the Group’s growth strategy. See page 119 for 
further analysis.

Mitigation of risk
To protect the Group and its depositors, the Group maintains a liquidity buffer, which is based on its 
liquidity needs under stressed conditions. The liquidity buffer is monitored on a daily basis to ensure 
there are sufficient liquid assets at all times to cover cash flow movements and fluctuations in funding 
and to enable the Group to meet all financial obligations and to support anticipated asset growth. 
Liquidity requirements under stressed conditions are considered as part of the ILAA process. Through 
the ILAA process, the Group has assessed the level of liquidity necessary to prudently cover systemic 
and idiosyncratic risks and the ILAA process determines the appropriate liquidity buffer, taking into 
account the specific nature of the deposit base. See page 115 for further analysis.

Mitigation of risk
Where possible the Group seeks to match the interest rate structure of assets with liabilities or 
deposits creating a natural hedge. Where this is not possible the Group will enter into swap 
agreements to convert fixed interest rate liabilities into variable rate liabilities, which are then 
matched with variable interest rate assets. See page 117 for further analysis.

39

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportPrincipal risks and uncertainties 
continued

Market risk

Definition
The financial impact from 
movements in market 
prices on the value of assets 
and liabilities.

Mitigation of risk
The Group does not seek to take or expose itself to market risk, and does not carry out proprietary 
trading, although certain liquid asset investments which form part of the liquid asset buffer may 
carry a limited amount of mark-to-market risk which is regularly monitored. It is accordingly 
considered that there is minimal exposure to market risk. See page 117 for further analysis.

Operational risk

Definition
The risk of financial loss 
and/or reputational damage 
resulting from inadequate 
or failed internal processes, 
people and systems or from 
external events including 
financial crime.

Conduct risk

Definition
The risk of detriment to the 
Group’s customers due to 
the inappropriate execution 
of its business activities and 
processes.

Mitigation of risk
The Group aims to minimise operational failures through the establishment and subsequent 
investment in sound systems, controls and audit functions. Further details are provided below.

Mitigation of risk
The Group has a zero appetite for systemic unfair outcomes that may result in significant detriment 
to the Group’s customers. 

However, occasional failures in operational processes may occur, for example administration and 
processing errors or interruptions to IT systems. These occasional events may have an impact on 
customers leading to customer detriment. The Group has set a tolerance around the detriment 
caused through such non-systemic process failings. 

The Group has reviewed its conduct risk framework and is rolling out further improvements 
in 2015. The Group mitigates conduct risk by monitoring various operational metrics and by 
tracking activities which affect customers, monitoring customer complaints, implementing process 
improvements and adhering to service standards. Further details are provided below.

Strategic risk

As described above, the Group seeks 
to mitigate strategic risk through the 
application of the Risk Management 
Framework. The section below provides 
further details of how strategic risk 
can arise.

The Group’s strategic direction and 
performance is impacted by external 
factors (that are similar to those impacting 
other financial institutions) and internal 
operational factors.

External factors
External factors include uncertainty 
around future interest rate movements 
and increased competition, especially 
from new entrants to the market, which 
may challenge product and pricing 
margins. The Group closely monitors 
competitor activity, pricing, and customer 
behaviour and feedback and reflects this 
in pricing and marketing plans.

As with other financial institutions, the 
Group is also affected by the level 
of litigation activity environment. 
However, the Group has not sold any 
PPI products and only provides advice to 
retail mortgage customers on a limited 
basis. The Group does not currently 
operate in the retail lending space of 
unsecured personal loans, credit cards or 
current accounts.

As a regulated business, the Group 
must also comply with the complex 
and changing regulatory environment. 
Prudential and conduct regulation 
continues to evolve and the Group 
maintains regulatory monitoring activity 
to understand future requirements 
and how this may affect the Group. 
To comply with current prudential 
regulatory requirements, the Group 
maintains adequate capital and liquidity 
resources to satisfy these requirements at 
all times. Notwithstanding, the Group’s 
borrowing costs and capital requirements 
could be affected by future prudential 
regulatory developments. 

40

There remains a keen focus on capital 
management to ensure that the Group 
has an appropriate capital structure 
in place to support the Group’s 
growth strategy. 

The Group has a zero risk appetite for 
material regulatory breaches. To ensure 
compliance with regulatory requirements, 
the Group has policies, processes and 
standards which provide the framework 
for business activities and staff to operate 
to which are in accordance with the laws, 
regulations and voluntary codes which 
apply to the Group and its activities. 
Compliance with regulation incurs 
significant costs which are factored into 
the operational cost and are considered 
in relation to the specific products and 
services that the Group offers. 

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportInternal factors
Internal factors which impact strategic risk 
include the adequacy of IT systems, data 
security, project management, supplier 
and outsourcing arrangements and 
from internal and third party fraud and 
compliance failings. As the Group grows 
it continues to monitor the adequacy 
and ability of its third party suppliers 
to support the Group, now and in the 
future and where necessary will seek 
alternative arrangements.

The Group distribution strategy involves 
the use of intermediaries based in the 
UK. As a result of this strategy, the 
Group is exposed to the risk inherent 
in relying on third parties to sell and 
promote products. There is a risk that 
intermediaries act inappropriately or 
fail to adhere to applicable conduct 
regulations or standards in the sale of the 
Group’s loan products, which could harm 
the Group’s brand and/or reputation. 
Other risks include that the Group may 
fail to develop products that are attractive 
to intermediaries or otherwise not 
succeed in developing relationships with 
intermediaries and could therefore lose 
the service of intermediaries. 

Operational risk

A key internal factor is operational risk, 
which is the risk of loss resulting from 
inadequate or failed internal processes, 
people and systems or from external 
events. This risk includes IT, information 
security, project, outsourcing, tax, legal, 
fraud and compliance risks. 

The Group aims to maintain robust 
operational systems and controls and 
seeks to operate within the defined 
level of operational risk. The operational 
risk appetite considers risk events, the 
assessment of internal controls as well 
as holding additional capital for certain 
operational risks. 

As part of the operational risk 
management process, the Group has an 
Operational Risk Policy, and undertakes 
a Risk & Control Self-Assessment process 
across the Group, and has business 
continuity plans in place. The Group uses 
an Enterprise Risk Management system 
to support the recording of risks and 
controls as well as monitoring operational 
risks and risk events.

Through the establishment of, and 
investment in, sound systems, controls 
and audit functions, the Group aims 
to minimise’s operational failures. 
Operational risk is reviewed by the 
Business Risk Committee, which meets 
monthly to ensure that a quality and 
robust IT, operations and compliance 
service is delivered at all times and is 
capable of supporting the changing 
business requirements of the Group. 
It has responsibility for monitoring all 
the key operational risks facing the 
organisation, including compliance and 
operational risks. The Business Risk 
Committee provides a monthly report 
to the Executive Risk Committee on 
operational risk matters.

The Group has placed emphasis on 
ensuring that the IT infrastructure, 
performance, resilience, and security 
meet the on-going needs of the business. 
In particular significant investment in 
cyber risk controls to ensure that the 
Group maintains appropriate levels of 
controls to counter the increasing threat 
of cyber-crime across the banking and 
financial services industries.

The Group currently has a significant 
change agenda which includes the 
concurrent running of numerous projects. 
These projects include IT based projects 
designed to ensure that the Group’s 
infrastructure remains modern and 
scalable, to support the Group’s growth 
strategy. Therefore the Group is exposed 
to execution risk on these projects. 

Conduct risk

Conduct risk is the risk of detriment 
caused to the Group’s customers due to 
the inappropriate execution of its business 
activities and processes. The Group 
extends the definition of ‘customer’ to 
include both retail and SME commercial 
customers (but excludes intermediaries 
and/other third parties) across all business 
segments, including both regulated and 
non-regulated activities, thereby applying 
its conduct risk policies to all lending and 
deposit-taking activities.

The Group has a zero appetite for 
systemic unfair outcomes, which may 
result in significant detriment to the 
Group’s customers. Systemic unfair 
outcomes may arise from poor product 
design, poor sale processes or 
unacceptable operational practices which 
risk repeated or continual outcomes 
which are detrimental to customers.

However, occasional failures in 
operational processes may occur, for 
example administration and processing 
errors or interruptions to IT systems. 
These occasional events may have 
an impact on customers, leading to 
customer detriment. The Group has 
set a tolerance around the detriment 
caused through such non-systemic 
process failings.

The risk is that customers can suffer 
detriment due to actions, processes or 
products which originate from within the 
Group. Conduct risk can arise through 
the design of products that do not 
meet customers’ needs, mishandling 
complaints where the Group has 
behaved inappropriately towards its 
customers, inappropriate sale processes 
and exhibiting behaviour that does not 
meet market or regulatory standards.

Customer detriment could affect the 
Group’s reputation, lead to loss of market 
share due to damage to Aldermore’s 
brand, may lead to customer redress 
payments and could lead to regulatory 
action and censure.

The Group mitigates conduct risk by 
monitoring various operational metrics 
and by tracking activities which affect 
customers, monitoring customer 
complaints, implementing process 
improvements and adhering to service 
standards. The conduct risk metrics 
(which include among others, staff 
performance levels, training, customer 
feedback and complaints, product 
retention rates and cancellations, arrears 
levels and customer service standards) 
vary across the business lines and consist 
of individual business line conduct risk 
KPIs, the sum of which is measured 
against the risk appetite.

Conduct risk metrics and KPIs are in 
place to evidence fair outcomes, identify 
any emerging issues and document 
remedial actions. Each customer-facing 
area is responsible for implementing 
controls designed to manage and 
report on conduct risk, which includes 
understanding how customer detriment 
may occur, how it is identified and 
how it is prevented going forward. 
Conduct risk is monitored by the Business 
Risk Committee.

41

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportOur customers, people 
and communities

By acting in a socially 
beneficial and ethical 
manner, we are both 
contributing to the 
communities where 
we operate and also 
supporting our strategy, 
long-term performance 
and the sustainability of 
our business. 

Our brand pillars – total transparency, 
exceptional service and community – 
shape everything we do and inform our 
approach to our customers, our people 
and our communities.

Businesses that last have a purpose 
beyond simply making money. This is 
why we are committed to fulfilling the 
responsibilities that come with being 
a British bank supporting SMEs, 
homeowners and savers. 

Our customers

Our aim is to deliver exceptional service. 
By exceeding customers’ expectations, 
we are differentiating Aldermore from 
its competitors, helping to attract and 
retain customers. 

We continue to focus on our digital 
infrastructure to ensure that our customers 
can interact with us whenever is most 
convenient for them. Visits to our website 
exceeded 1.85 million in 2014, up 19 per 
cent. Over 76 per cent of retail savings 
applications and all of our SME savings 
applications are now taken online.

At the end of 2014, we relaunched our 
website to simplify the customer journey 
and improve usability. Navigation is now 
customer-led, meaning visitors can select 
who they are, to help them find suitable 
products and services. The website is 
tablet and mobile friendly to enable 
visitors to access the information they 
need wherever they are.

We are dedicated to transparency in 
everything we do. In 2012, we launched 
unedited ratings and reviews on our 
website, giving every customer the 
opportunity to comment on our products 
and services online. Initially launched 
for Retail Deposits, SME Deposits and 
Invoice Finance, we extended the service 
to Residential Mortgage customers in 
2014. We received 1,904 reviews across 
our Ratings & Reviews service during 
2014 and achieved an average rating of 
4.6 out of 5, something we are very proud 
of and an endorsement of our approach. 

Not all of the feedback we receive is 
positive and there are times we fall short. 
If we receive a complaint, it is investigated 
by the relevant business line and reported 
to our Executive Team. 

We actively use feedback from our 
customers to improve our products 
and processes.

In 2014, improvements included 
changing our 0845 telephone number 
to a 0345 number so that calls are free 
from mobile phones as well as landlines; 
simplifying our payments processes 
to make faster payment options more 
obvious; and streamlining the process 
for opening multiple accounts by linking 
automatically to data from the original 
account instead of making the customer 
repeat the full process.

Ratings & Reviews
We read every 
comment that we 
receive through 
our online Ratings 
& Reviews service. 
Customers regularly 
suggest improvements 
to our products 
and services and 
we always consider 
these suggestions 
when developing 
our offering.

42

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Strategic reportOur people

In 2014, the number of people we 
employ increased by 28 per cent taking 
the total number of employees to 876. 
To support this growth, we focused on 
our recruitment and induction processes. 
Recognising the importance of social 
media for reaching key talent, we have 
increased our use of channels such as 
LinkedIn for recruitment. 

In the second half of 2014, we centralised 
our induction programme to ensure a 
consistent introduction to the Group for 
all new starters. Each new starter is invited 
to a full day workshop in which they 
learn about our brand, values, approach 
to risk management and our products 
and services.

We are committed to employee 
engagement at Aldermore. To reward 
and recognise the contribution our 
people make, we relaunched our REDStar 
recognition scheme which rewards our 
people for going above and beyond. 
The scheme now sees us rewarding 
weekly nominees and quarterly overall 
winners. Throughout the year we received 
358 REDStar nominations.

We also understand that clear career 
progression has a positive impact on 
employee motivation. During 2014, 
137 of our people were promoted 
or moved into new roles and 27 per 
cent of positions were filled internally. 
To encourage career development, we 
launched a ‘Building Your Career’ toolkit 
which is now widely used and accessible 
to all.

Best Companies ‘One to Watch’ accreditation
We have been awarded ‘One to Watch’ status by 
Best Companies to Work For, acknowledging our 
progress towards making Aldermore a great place 
to work. The Best Companies Index is recognised as 
a leading measure of workplace excellence.

We place a great deal of importance on 
ensuring that the lines of communication 
between our people and the Group’s 
leaders are two-way and transparent. 
We have continued our programme of 
Executive visits to our regional offices 
during which our people are able to meet 
and hear from senior members of the 
Aldermore team.

We hold an annual employee roadshow 
in which we bring our people together to 
update them on the Group’s vision and 
strategy. The roadshow also provides a 
forum for our people to pose questions 
to the Executive Team and to network 
with their colleagues. Roadshow events 
were held in Manchester, Leicester and 
Reading to enable all of our people to 
attend regardless of their geographical 
location. Following the roadshow, 84 per 
cent of respondents felt they had a good 
understanding of our vision and strategy.

At the end of 2014, we took part in 
the Sunday Times ‘Best Companies to 
Work For’ survey and were accredited 
as ‘One to Watch’. We are very proud 
of this recognition and our people are 
clearly proud to work for Aldermore.

Our communities

We make a real effort to give back to our 
communities, whether it is supporting 
the country’s vital SME community, 
making a positive contribution to the 
local communities in which we operate or 
behaving as a responsible member of the 
UK’s financial services community.

Our commitment to Britain’s SME 
community extends beyond simply 
providing lending to businesses. 
In September, we piloted our first 
‘Helping You Grow Your Business’ event, 
inviting our customers and introducers 
to a topical discussion on industry trends 
which included representation from 
the Bank of England. It also provided 
individuals the opportunity to network 
with like-minded businesses.

We realise the importance of sharing our 
industry insight as widely as possible, 
which is why we produce regular industry 
research. In 2014, this included our 
quarterly ‘SME Monitor’ report produced 
in conjunction with the Centre for 
Economics and Business Research (Cebr) 
which looked at cost inflation amongst 
Britain’s SMEs. Our ‘Saving SMEs’ report 
provided a measure of the business 
savings market by analysing SMEs’ 
attitudes towards saving.

Executive roadshow
We are committed 
to giving our people 
regular updates on 
the Group’s strategic 
vision and direction. 
Our annual Executive 
roadshow ensures 
that all employees 
hear directly from our 
Executives and can 
ask any questions they 
may have.

43

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportStrategic report

Our customers, people 
and communities continued

Aldermore 
Community Team
The Aldermore 
Community Team 
(ACT) was established 
in October 2014 
to enhance our 
‘Community’ brand 
pillar and is responsible 
for our community and 
fundraising initiatives. 
We have ACT 
champions based in 
each of our 12 offices.

Our communities continued

We also recognise our duty to help 
our intermediary partners deliver 
exceptional service to their SME clients. 
To support the commercial finance broker 
community, we launched our ‘Next 
Generation Training Academy’ which 
sees us provide training to junior staff 
at our Asset Finance broker partners. 
This initiative has reinforced our broker 
relationships and is another way we are 
helping SMEs to access the expertise 
they need.

Recognising the important contribution 
made by entrepreneurs to the British 
economy, we support the SKILL! 
Programme which promotes business 
skills and entrepreneurialism amongst 
young people. This year our staff acted 
as corporate mentors to budding 
entrepreneurs at schools in Manchester, 
Reading and Peterborough.

We regularly run community and 
fundraising activities. In October 2014, 
we launched the Aldermore Community 
Team (ACT), a group of volunteers 
spanning our offices who are responsible 
for managing these initiatives. The team 
has already staged several fundraising 
events coordinated across the Group.

Our £ for £ Matching Scheme sees us 
top up charitable contributions made 
by our employees. Through the scheme 
we donated £11,360 to non-profit and 
community organisations during 2014. 
Causes supported included the Royal 
British Legion, Macmillan Cancer Support 
and Help the Hospices.

Through our support for Government 
schemes encouraging lending to 
businesses and homeowners, we aim 
to play our part in Britain’s banking 
community. Aldermore has been an 

enthusiastic participant in the Funding for 
Lending Scheme, providing much-needed 
credit to Britain’s SMEs, and was an early 
adopter of the Help to Buy scheme.

As a bank supporting over 160,000 
customers, it is vital that we contribute our 
views to industry discussions and respond 
to Government consultations on the 
banking needs of SMEs and individuals. 
The evidence we gave to the Business, 
Innovation and Skills Select Committee 
on the Government’s support for SMEs in 
December is just one instance where we 
have been able to share our experiences. 

Our communities are extremely 
important to us and we are committed 
to making a positive contribution to 
them. In this way, we are not only giving 
something back but also supporting 
the long-term performance and 
sustainability of Aldermore.

Approved by the Board and signed on 
its behalf by:

Phillip Monks 
Director 

16 February 2015

44

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Governance

Corporate 
governance report

Introduction
This aim of this Corporate governance report is to provide shareholders with 
a clear view of the Group’s corporate governance approach.

The Group is committed to the highest standards of corporate governance. 
The corporate governance of the Group has evolved during the year in order 
to strengthen further the robust framework by which the Group is governed. 
This report represents the position as at 2014 year-end unless stated otherwise. 
The following sections provide details of the role and composition of the Board, 
its Committees and other key individuals and committees. 

Aldermore Bank PLC is owned 100 per cent by Aldermore Group PLC. During the 
year, changes were made to conform the respective Boards so that the same 
Directors served on both Boards. 

This Corporate governance report includes the following sections:

1.   Overview of the Corporate 

Governance Structure 

2.  The Board 

a.  Board composition
b.  Roles and responsibilities of the Board
c.  Role of the Chairman
d.  The role of the Senior Independent Director
e.  Changes to the Board
f. 

 Director’s induction and ongoing 
professional development
g.  Directors’ conflicts of interest

3.  Board Committees 

a.   Composition of Board Committees
b.  Audit Committee
c.  Risk Committee
d.  Remuneration Committee
e.  Nomination Committee

4.  Executive Team 

a.  Details of the Executive Team
b.   The role of the Chief Executive Officer 

and Executive Committees

c.  Executive Committees

5.  Company Secretary 

46

 47 

 49

 51

 51

45

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportCorporate governance 
 report continued

1. Overview of the Corporate Governance Structure as at 1 January 2015

Aldermore Group PLC Corporate Governance Framework

Aldermore Group PLC

Aldermore Bank PLC

Board Committees

Audit  
Committee

Risk  
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

CEO

Executive Committees

ExCo 
(CEO)

ExCo Risk 
(CRO)

Strategy 
Board

Treasury 
Management 
Committee

Asset and 
Liability 
Committee

IT and 
Transformation  
Board

3 Divisional 
Boards*

Product 
Committee

Business 
Risk 
Committee

Management 
Credit 
Committee

Performance oversight

Risk oversight

*  Divisional Boards comprise of: Mortgages Board, Commercial Finance Board (Asset Finance and Invoice Finance) and Savings Board

46

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014 Governance2. The Board 

a. Board composition as at 31 December 2014

The Board

Non-Executive Directors:

Glyn Jones (Chairman)
Peter Cartwright (Non-Executive Director)
Neil Cochrane (Non-Executive Director)
Danuta Gray (Senior Independent Director)
John Callender26 (Independent Non-Executive Director)

John Hitchins (Independent Non-Executive Director)
Christopher Stamper (Independent Non-Executive Director)
Cathy Turner (Independent Non-Executive Director)
Peter Shaw (Independent Non-Executive Director)

Executive Directors:
Phillip Monks (Chief Executive Officer)
James Mack (Chief Financial Officer)

As at 31 December 2014 the Board consisted of nine Non-Executive Directors (including the Chairman) and two Executive 
Directors. During 2014 there were a number of changes to the composition of the Board as detailed on page 48. The Board 
regards all of the Non-Executive Directors, other than Peter Cartwright and Neil Cochrane (appointed as shareholder 
Directors by the Group’s principal shareholders, AnaCap Financial Partners and AnaCap Financial Partners II (‘AnaCap’)) and 
Glyn Jones (as Chairman), as ‘independent Non-Executive Directors’ (within the meaning of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code) and free from any business or other relationship that could materially interfere with the exercise of their independent 
judgement. The Board regarded Glyn Jones as independent upon his appointment as Chairman (within the meaning of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code).

The Board currently includes two female members, 18 per cent of its total composition. 

b. Roles and responsibilities of the Board
The Board is collectively responsible to the shareholders and its other stakeholders for the long term success of the Group. 
The Board is committed to implementing and maintaining a well-defined and well-structured corporate governance 
framework to achieve long term sustainable success. The Board has responsibility for determining the business strategy and 
related risk appetite of the Group and to monitor performance against the plan, objectives and performance indicators for 
each area. The Board also has responsibility to maintain a system of internal controls, which provide assurance of effective 
and efficient operations, internal financial controls and compliance with all applicable laws and regulations. Additionally, 
the Board is responsible for ensuring that the executive maintain an effective risk management and oversight process 
across the Group to enable delivery of the strategy and business performance within the approved risk appetite and risk 
control framework. 

Fundamentally, the Board is the main decision making forum for the Group. Therefore, all matters of significance because 
of their strategic, risk, financial, key person, regulatory or reputation implications or consequences are addressed by the 
Board. However, certain matters are reserved for the Group’s principal shareholders, AnaCap, and the Board actively engages 
AnaCap on all such matters through the shareholder Directors.

In addition, the Board sets annual objectives for each year in addition to setting the Group’s strategic direction. These are 
implemented through approval and regular assessment of the business plan and strategy process. At each Board meeting the 
Directors discuss strategic and business matters, financial, operational, risk and governance issues and other relevant business 
items that arise. Following Board Committee meetings the Board receives oral reports from the Chairs of each Committee at 
the next Board meeting.

26 John Callender resigned with effect from 27 February 2015.

47

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportCorporate governance 
 report continued

2. The Board continued

c. Role of the Chairman
Glyn Jones was appointed as Chairman in March 2014.

As Chairman, Glyn’s primary objective is the governance of the Board. He leads the Board and is primarily responsible for 
setting the Board’s agenda and ensuring that adequate time is available for discussion of all key agenda items, in particular 
strategic issues. The Chairman promotes a culture of openness and debate by facilitating the effective contribution of 
Non-Executive Directors and ensuring constructive relations between Executive and Non-Executive Directors. He also 
ensures Directors receive accurate, timely and clear information and that there is effective communication with shareholders. 
The Chairman is not responsible for the running of the day-to-day business of the Group, such duty being delegated to the 
Chief Executive Officer by the Board.

Details of Glyn’s other business commitments are included in his biography and the Board is satisfied that these commitments 
do not interfere with the performance of his duties for the Group. 

There is a clear division of responsibilities between the Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer.

Prior to Glyn’s appointment, John Callender acted as Interim Chairman.

d. The role of the Senior Independent Director
Danuta Gray joined the Board as the Senior Independent Director in September 2014. 

The Senior Independent Director is available to shareholders if they have concerns that the normal channels of 
communication to shareholders via the Chairman, Chief Executive Officer or other Executive Directors have failed to resolve 
any issues, or for which such channels of communication are inappropriate. 

The Senior Independent Director will meet with the other Non-Executive Directors without the Chairman present once a year 
and on other occasions, as appropriate, to appraise the Chairman’s performance.

Details of Danuta’s other business commitments are included in her biography on page 52 and the Board is satisfied that 
these commitments do not interfere with the performance of her duties for the Group.

e. Changes to the Board27

Name

Position

Relevant Date

David Soskin

Non-Executive Director

Resigned from the Board on 02/06/2014

Christopher Stamper

Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 06/02/2014

Appointed to the Board on 06/02/2014 

Glyn Jones

Cathy Turner

John Hitchins

Peter Shaw

Neil Cochrane

Danuta Gray

Steve Barry

Paul Myers

Mark Stephens

Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 21/03/2014

Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 28/05/2014

Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 28/05/2014

Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 04/09/2014

Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 04/09/2014

Non-Executive Director

Appointed to the Board on 29/09/2014

Executive Director

Executive Director

Executive Director

Resigned from the Board on 21/09/2014

Resigned from the Board on 21/09/2014

Resigned from the Board on 21/09/2014

27  The Executive Directors above who resigned from the Board on 21 September 2014 did so in order to ensure the Group could meet UK Corporate Governance Code requirements for the 

Board to have a majority of independent Non-Executive Directors; all three executives continue to work for the Group in their executive roles.

48

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014 Governancef. Directors’ induction and ongoing professional development 
All Directors receive a comprehensive tailored induction programme. The induction programme includes an introduction 
to the Board and the business, including strategy, key risks and topical issues in order to enhance their understanding and 
knowledge of the Group’s business and operations.

The Board also receives regular training and briefing sessions for on-going professional development both internally and 
externally in order to update and refresh their skills and knowledge.

g. Directors’ conflicts of interest
The Companies Act 2006 provides that a Director must avoid situations where he/she can have a direct or indirect interest 
that conflicts or might conflict with the interests of the Group. The Company’s Articles of Association contain provisions 
that allow the Board to consider and, if it sees fit, authorise such conflicts in certain situations. The Board confirms that such 
powers have been operated effectively and that a formal system for Directors to declare their interests and for the non-
conflicted Directors to authorise conflicts continues to be in place.

3. Board Committees

The Board is supported by four key Committees:

•  Audit Committee

•  Risk Committee

•  Remuneration Committee

•  Nomination Committee

a. Composition of Board Committees at 31 December 2014
Details of the respective responsibilities of each Committee are provided below.

Audit 
Committee

Risk 
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

John Hitchins (Chair)

John Callender (Chair)28

Cathy Turner (Chair)

Glyn Jones (Chair)

Peter Cartwright

Peter Shaw

Christopher Stamper
John Callender28

Peter Cartwright

John Hitchins

Christopher Stamper 
Peter Shaw29

Danuta Gray

Peter Shaw

Glyn Jones

Peter Cartwright

Peter Cartwright

Danuta Gray
John Callender28

Cathy Turner

b. Audit Committee
The Audit Committee is made up of five members, four of whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. The Audit 
Committee is chaired by John Hitchins, who is considered by the Board to have recent and relevant financial experience. 
Further details of John’s experience are provided in his biography on page 53.

The Audit Committee30 met eight times in 2014 – three times as the Audit and Risk Committee and five times as the 
Audit Committee.

The Audit Committee’s responsibilities include the monitoring of the integrity of the Group’s financial statements and the 
involvement of the External Auditors in that process as well as reviewing the Group’s internal control and risk management 
systems. It focuses in particular on compliance with accounting policies and accounting estimates and ensuring that an 
effective system of internal financial control is maintained. The ultimate responsibility for reviewing and approving the annual 
report and accounts and the half-yearly reports, remains with the Board. 

The Audit Committee also receives regular updates from Internal Audit. The Committee reviews and assesses the annual 
Internal Audit work plan and receives reports on the results of the Internal Auditors’ work. 

28 John Callender resigned from the Board and its committees with effect from 27 February 2015.

29 Peter Shaw has been appointed Chair of the Risk Committee and a member of the Nomination Committee, replacing John Callender with effect from 1 March 2015.

30 Until June 2014 part of a joint Audit and Risk Committee.

49

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportCorporate governance 
 report continued

3. Board Committees continued

The Audit Committee formally reports to the Board on its proceedings after each meeting on matters within its duties and 
responsibilities, including how these duties and responsibilities have been discharged. In addition, the Audit Committee 
makes recommendations to the Board on any area within its remit where action is required.

c. Risk Committee
The Risk Committee is made up of five members, four of whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. During 2014, the Risk 
Committee was chaired by John Callender31. Further details of John’s experience are provided in his biography on page 53. 

The Risk Committee32 met six times in 2014 – three times as the Audit and Risk Committee and three times as the 
Risk Committee.

The Risk Committee’s responsibilities include the development and maintenance of the Group’s Risk Management Framework, 
ensuring that its strategy, principles, policies and resources are aligned to the Group’s risk appetite, as well as to regulatory and 
industry best practices. The Risk Committee also monitors and reviews the formal arrangements established by the Board in 
respect of internal controls and the Risk Management Framework and reviews the effectiveness of the Group’s systems for risk 
management and compliance with financial services legislation and regulatory requirements.

The Risk Committee formally reports to the Board on its proceedings after each meeting on matters within its duties and 
responsibilities, including how these duties and responsibilities have been discharged. In addition, the Risk Committee makes 
recommendations to the Board on any area within its remit where action is required and makes recommendations to the 
Remuneration Committee on issues that should be taken into account in remuneration decisions.

d. Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee is made of five members, three of whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. 
The Remuneration Committee is chaired by Cathy Turner. Further details of Cathy’s experience are provided in her biography 
on page 53. Prior to Cathy, the post was held by John Callender.

The Remuneration Committee met four times in 2014.

The Remuneration Committee’s responsibilities include assisting the Board in relation to the Group’s remuneration framework, 
including making recommendations to the Board on the Group’s policy on executive remuneration, setting the over-arching 
principles and parameters of the Group’s remuneration policy and determining the individual remuneration and benefits 
package of each of the Group’s Executive Directors and certain senior Executives. The remuneration of Non-Executive 
Directors is a matter for the Chairman and Executive Directors of the Board. No Director or senior manager shall be involved 
in any decisions as to their own remuneration.

The Remuneration Committee is also responsible for recommending and monitoring the structure and level of remuneration 
for senior management, including pension rights and any compensation payments. 

The Remuneration Committee formally reports to the Board on its proceedings after each meeting on matters within 
its duties and responsibilities, including how these duties and responsibilities have been discharged. In addition, the 
Remuneration Committee makes recommendations to the Board on any area within its remit where action is required.

e. Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee is made up of five members, three of whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. 
The Nomination Committee is chaired by Glyn Jones. Further, details of Glyn’s experience are provided in his biography on 
page 52. Prior to Glyn’s appointment, the post was held by John Callender.

The Nomination Committee met formally once in 2014. On other occasions, the full Board discharged the responsibilities of 
the Committee.

The Nomination Committee’s responsibilities include considering and making recommendations to the Board in respect of 
appointments to the Board, the Board Committees and the chairmanship of the Board Committees. It is also responsible 
for keeping the structure, size and composition of the Board under regular review, and for making recommendations to the 
Board with regard to any changes necessary. This Committee also considers succession planning, taking into account the skills 
and expertise that will be needed on the Board in the future. 

The Nomination Committee formally reports to the Board on its proceedings after each meeting on matters within its duties 
and responsibilities, including how these duties and responsibilities have been discharged. In addition, the Nomination 
Committee makes recommendations to the Board on any area within its remit where action is required.

31 Peter Shaw has been appointed Chair of the Risk Committee with effect from 1 March 2015.

32 Until June 2014 part of a joint Audit and Risk Committee. In addition, the Board Credit Committee met twice during 2014 before being amalgamated with the Risk Committee.

50

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014 Governance4. Executive Team

a. Details of the Executive Team

James Mack
Chief Financial 
Officer

Responsible for 
the Finance and 
Treasury functions

Steve Barry
Chief Risk 
Officer

Responsible 
for Credit, 
Operational, and 
Treasury Risk 
and Compliance

Phillip Monks 
Chief Executive Officer

Paul Myers
Chief Operating 
Officer

Responsible 
for the Savings 
division and 
the Group’s 
infrastructure 
including IT

Ali Humphries
Group HR 
Director

Responsible for 
the HR function 
including reward, 
performance 
management 
and recruitment

Vicki Harris
Group Strategy 
and Marketing 
Director

Responsible for 
Marketing and 
Group Strategy

Mark Stephens
Deputy CEO 
and Group 
Commercial 
Director

Responsible for 
the Mortgages 
division and the 
Commercial 
Finance division, 
comprising 
Invoice and 
Asset Finance

b. The role of the Chief Executive Officer and Executive Committees
Phillip Monks has direct charge of the Group on a day-to-day basis and is accountable to the Board for the financial and 
operational performance of the Group. Phillip was part of the team that founded the Bank in 2009 and has over 30 year’s 
industry experience. Further details of Phillip’s experience are provided in his biography on page 52.

He is supported by the Executive Team, who make up the two Executive Committees (ExCo) whose responsibility it is to 
implement the strategic objectives as agreed by the Board. ExCo, under the leadership of the CEO, is responsible for the 
management of the Group.

As set out on page 46, the ExCo is split into two committees:

•  Executive Committee (Performance)

•  Executive Risk Committee

c. Executive Committees
A number of sub-committees report into ExCo and assist with monitoring and oversight of the running of the business. 

The following sub-committees report to the Executive Committee (Performance):

•  Strategy Board

•  Divisional Boards (Mortgages, Commercial Finance, Savings)

•  IT and Transformation Board

•  Treasury Management Committee

The following sub-committees report to Executive Risk Committee:

•  Asset and Liability Committee

•  Business Risk Committee

•  Management Credit Committee

•  Product Committee

5. Company Secretary

The Company Secretary is responsible for advising the Board through the Chairman on all governance related matters. 
All Directors have access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary.

51

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic report Board of Directors

Executive Directors

Phillip Monks

Chief Executive Officer, 
Age 54

James Mack

Chief Financial Officer, 
Age 43

Phillip was part of the team which founded 
Aldermore in 2009 and has over 30 years’ 
industry experience.
Most recently he established, and obtained a 
banking licence for, Europe Arab Bank where he 
was CEO until 2008.
Prior to this, Phillip held senior roles within 
Barclays Bank plc, including Branch Director 
of Barclays Private Bank in Geneva, Director 
of Business and Corporate Banking in North 
West England, Managing Director of Barclays 
Corporate Banking in London, the Midlands 
and South East and, finally, CEO of Gerrard 
Investment Management from 2003 upon its 
acquisition by Barclays from Old Mutual plc.

James joined Aldermore in June 2013 
and is responsible for the Finance and 
Treasury functions.
From 2010, he held a number of senior finance 
roles within the Co-operative Banking Group 
including Acting CFO, Director of Financial 
Control and Head of Financial Planning 
and Analysis.
Prior to this, James spent six years with the 
Skipton Building Society and was instrumental in 
leading the merger with the Scarborough Building 
Society. James joined KPMG in 1993 and spent 
11 years in their financial services practice.

Danuta Gray

Senior Independent 
Director, 
Age 55 

Peter Cartwright

Non-Executive Director, 
Age 49 

Danuta joined the Board as the Senior 
Independent Director in September 2014.
Danuta has extensive business experience having 
spent 26 years in the telecommunications sector. 
Starting her career at BT in 1984, Danuta held 
numerous senior roles becoming Senior Vice 
President, BT Europe in 1999.
During her time at BT she gained experience in 
marketing, customer service, communications, 
technology and sales, and in leading and 
implementing change.
Danuta was Chairman of Telefonica O2 in Ireland 
until December 2012, having previously been its 
Chief Executive from 2001 to 2010.
Previously Danuta served for seven years on the 
Board of Irish Life & Permanent PLC as Chairman 
of the Remuneration Committee and was a Non-
Executive Director of Aer Lingus PLC from 2006 
– 2013. Danuta is currently also a Non-Executive 
Director at Old Mutual PLC, Michael Page 
International PLC and Paddy Power PLC.

Peter’s involvement with the Board dates back to 
the launch of Aldermore in May 2009.
He is one of the founding partners of AnaCap 
Financial Partners LLP where he is also the 
Co-Managing Principal responsible for developing 
AnaCap’s portfolio company investments.
Prior to AnaCap, Peter was Commercial Director 
within a speciality insurance services provider 
backed by a UK-based private equity firm, and 
between 1999 and 2003 was Sales & Marketing 
Director and Operations Director for GMAC 
UK and On:line Finance, respectively, having 
previously worked for GE Capital.
Peter is an experienced business builder 
and operational specialist and holds various 
Non-Executive and supervisory Board roles 
within banks and financial services companies 
across Europe.

Non-Executive Directors

Glyn Jones

Chairman, 
Age 62

Glyn joined the Board as Chairman in March 
2014. He is currently the Senior Independent 
Director on the Board of Direct Line Insurance 
Group plc and, since May 2007, has been the 
Chairman of Aspen Insurance Holdings Limited, 
a New York listed specialty lines insurance and 
re-insurance business.
Glyn was formerly the Chairman of Towry 
Holdings Limited between 2006 and 2011. 
He also served as Chairman of Hermes Fund 
Managers from 2008 to 2011 and was Chairman 
of the sister company BT Pension Scheme 
Management for a part of this period.
Glyn was Chief Executive Officer of the 
independent investment group, Thames River 
Capital, from 2005 to 2006. From 2000, he served 
as Chief Executive Officer of Gartmore Investment 
Management in the UK for four years. Prior to 
this, Glyn was Chief Executive Officer of Coutts 
NatWest Group and Coutts Group, having joined 
in 1997.
In 1991, Glyn joined Standard Chartered in Hong 
Kong where he became the general manager 
of Global Private Banking. He was a consulting 
partner with Coopers & Lybrand/Deloitte Haskins 
& Sells Management Consultants from 1981 to 
1990. Glyn is a graduate of Cambridge University 
and a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants in England & Wales. 

52

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014 GovernanceNeil Cochrane

Non-Executive Director, 
Age 30 

John Hitchins

Independent 
Non-Executive Director, 
Age 60 

John Callender 

Independent 
Non-Executive Director, 
Age 64

Neil joined the Board in September 2014. Neil’s 
involvement with Aldermore dates back to May 
2010, when he joined AnaCap Financial Partners 
LLP’s Business Services team.
This role saw Neil take responsibility for day-to-
day interaction with senior management of the 
AnaCap’s portfolio companies on strategic and 
operational development.
Neil is currently an Investment Director within the 
team. Neil brings eight years strategic financial 
services experience to this role. He started his 
career as a consultant at Oliver Wyman Financial 
Services in 2006 where he was involved in a 
broad range of projects for banking and insurance 
clients. His assignments covered clients in the 
UK, Europe and the U.S. and were predominately 
focused on new business launches, strategy 
development, M&A and risk management.
Neil graduated from the University of Nottingham 
in 2006 with a BA (Hons) in Economics.

John is an independent Non-Executive Director 
and chairs the Audit Committee. He was appointed 
to Board in May 2014. He brings 36 years of 
experience in the audit arena, having spent his 
whole career at PricewaterhouseCoopers (‘PwC’), 
including as an audit partner. 
John was formerly Chairman of the Banking 
Committee of the Institute of Chartered 
Accountants in England & Wales and a Board 
member of the Institute’s Financial Services Faculty. 
He has also served as a member of the Institute’s 
Business Law Committee. During his career with 
PwC, John specialised in bank auditing and financial 
advisory services and his clients have included 
institutions such as Euroclear, Lloyds Banking Group, 
The Bank of England, Bank of Ireland, Britannia 
Building Society, Barclays, JP Morgan Chase 
and Nomura. 
Until recently, John was a member of the UK FCA 
Practitioner and Markets Practitioner Panels. He is 
currently a member of the Governing Council of the 
Centre for the Study of Financial Innovation, a not-
for-profit City-based think tank. John is a graduate 
of Oxford University and a Fellow of the Institute of 
Chartered Accountants in England & Wales.

John joined the Board in May 2009 and chairs 
the Risk Committee. John resigned from the 
Board and its committees with effect from 
27 February 2015.
He is currently Non-Executive chair of ANZ Bank 
Europe Ltd and holds Non-Executive Directorship 
at Ford Credit Europe Plc (where he chairs the 
Risk Committee and is a member of the Audit 
Committee), and at Motability Operations Plc 
(Where he chairs the Remuneration Committee 
and is a member of the Audit Committee).
John is also a member of the Financial Conduct 
Authority Regulatory Decisions Committee which 
he was invited to join in 2013. Until recently John 
served for a number of years as Governor of 
Reading Blue-Coat School in Sonning, Berkshire. 
Previously he was a senior executive in Barclays 
plc with considerable experience of operating in 
Europe, India and the USA, running a number of 
Businesses including the asset finance, leasing, 
invoice finance and contract hire operations. 
He served on the Board of the Finance and 
Leasing Trade Association for six years and was 
elected Chair for 1996/1997.

Peter Shaw

Independent 
Non-Executive Director, 
Age 55

Chris Stamper

Independent 
Non-Executive Director, 
Age 59

Cathy Turner

Independent 
Non-Executive Director, 
Age 51

Chris is an independent Non-Executive 
Director and was appointed to the Board in 
February 2014.
He brings 35 years of experience in the asset 
finance industry, most recently as Director and 
CEO of ING Lease (UK) Ltd. He is a founding 
governor of The Leasing Foundation and was a 
Director of Finance and Leasing Association Ltd. 
from 2003 to 2012 and a former Chairman of their 
Asset Finance Division.
Previously, Chris was Head of Abbey Business 
responsible for five business units focused on the 
SME market. Prior to this, Chris was the Managing 
Director of Lombard Sales Finance where he 
spent 21 years.

Peter joined the Board as an independent 
Non-Executive Director in September 2014 and 
will chair the Risk Committee with effect from 
1 March 2015.
Peter brings over 30 years financial services 
experience to his new role, having spent most of 
his career at RBS NatWest. Joining NatWest as a 
graduate trainee in 1981, Peter worked across a 
number of business areas during his career with 
the group including retail, SME, private banking, 
corporate banking, HR and risk.
Between 1994 and 2002, Peter was Managing 
Director of various group businesses offshore, 
based in Jersey. In 2002, Peter returned to the 
UK to become COO of the Risk Function at 
Group Head Office and between 2004 and 2010 
Peter was Chief Risk Officer for various group 
businesses including RBS UK Retail, Wealth & 
Ulster Bank. Between May 2012 and January 
2013, Peter acted as interim Chief Risk Officer for 
the Co-operative Banking Group.
Peter is currently also a Non-Executive Director 
at Bank of Ireland UK PLC, where he is chair of 
the bank’s Risk Committee and a member of the 
Audit Committee.
Peter graduated from London South Bank 
University in 1981 with a BA in Modern 
Languages. Peter holds an ACIB and DipFS. 
He is also a Fellow of the Chartered Institute 
of Bankers in Scotland.

Cathy is an independent Non-Executive Director 
and chairs the Remuneration Committee.
She was appointed to the Board in May 2014. 
She is currently Non-Executive Director and Chair 
of the Remuneration Committee of Countrywide 
plc. She is also a Vice President of UNICEF UK 
and a member of the Board of the Royal College 
of Art. She is also an Associate of the advisory 
group Manchester Square Partners.
Cathy has extensive industry experience working 
with Deloitte & Touche, Ernst & Young and 
Watson Wyatt as a compensation and benefits 
consultant in her early career. She subsequently 
joined Barclays PLC, where she was a member 
of the Group Executive Committee with 
responsibility for Human Resources, Corporate 
Affairs, Strategy and Brand and Marketing.
During her time with Barclays she was also 
Director, Investor Relations for four years and 
had extensive experience in remuneration in her 
many roles.
Most recently, she was Chief Administrative 
Officer of Lloyds Banking Group PLC. Cathy is a 
graduate of the University of Lancaster.

53

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportConsolidated 
 Directors’ report

The Directors present their consolidated Directors’ Report and the financial statements of the Group for the year ended 
31 December 2014.

Strategic Report

The Group has chosen, in accordance with section 414c(11) of the Companies Act 2006, as noted in this Directors’ Report, to 
include certain additional matters in its Strategic Report that would otherwise be required to be disclosed in this Directors’ 
Report.

Principal activity

The Group is authorised to accept deposits under the Financial Services & Markets Act 2000. The Group’s principal activities 
during 2014 were the provision of banking and related services in the United Kingdom. See page 10 for a description of the 
Group’s business model and strategy.

Corporate Governance

The Corporate Governance section set out on pages 45 to 53 forms part of this Directors’ Report.

Results and dividends

The results for the year are set out in the Income Statement on page 59. The profit before taxation for the year ended 
31 December 2014 was £50.3 million (2013: £25.7 million). A full review of the financial performance of the Group is included 
within the Strategic report starting on page 6.

The Directors do not recommend the payment of a dividend (2013: £nil).

Business review and future developments

The required information regarding the business review and future developments, key performance indicators and principal 
risks and uncertainties are contained within the Strategic Report.

Business review and future developments 

Key performance indicators 

Principal risks and uncertainties 

Financial instruments

Page

6

11

38

The Group uses financial instruments to manage certain types of risk, including liquidity and interest rate risk. Details of the 
objectives and management of these instruments are contained in the risk management section. Details of exposures to these 
risks, as well as credit risk are also provided in Note 41 to the consolidated financial statements.

Post balance sheet events

Details of significant events after 31 December 2014 are included in Note 44 to the consolidated financial statements and 
form part of this Report.

Capital management

The Board is required to consider all material risks which the Group faces and determines whether additional capital is 
required in order to provide further protection to depositors and borrowers and to ensure the Group is sufficiently well 
capitalised to withstand a severe economic downturn. Full details of the Group’s approach to capital management, including 
an analysis of the Group’s regulatory capital position, are provided in Note 42 to the consolidated financial statements.

On 9 December 2014, Aldermore Group PLC issued £75 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated 
Contingent Convertible Securities (the ‘Securities’). The Securities are perpetual and have no fixed redemption date. 
Redemption of the Securities is at the option of the Company on 30 April 2020 and annually thereafter. The Securities bear 
interest at an initial rate of 11.875 per cent p.a. until 30 April 2020 and thereafter at the relevant Reset Interest Rate as 
provided in the terms and conditions governing the securities. Interest is payable on the loan annually in arrears on each 
interest payment date commencing 30 April 2015 and is non-cumulative. The Borrower has the full discretion to cancel any 
interest scheduled to be paid on the Securities. The Securities are convertible into ordinary shares of the Company in the 
event of the Group’s Common Equity Tier 1 ratio falling below 7 per cent.

54

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014 Governance 
The issuance of the above securities raised proceeds of £75.1 million, which after deducting issuance costs, resulted in net 
proceeds of £73.7 million. Further details are provided in Note 36 to the consolidated financial statements.

Share capital

Details of the Company’s share capital at 31 December 2014 is provided in Note 35 to the consolidated financial statements.

Going concern

The financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis, as the Directors are satisfied that the Group has the 
resources to continue in business for the foreseeable future. In making this assessment, the Directors have considered a 
wide range of information relating to present and future conditions, including the current state of the balance sheet, future 
projections of profitability, cash flows and capital resources and the longer term strategy of the business. The Group’s capital 
and liquidity plans, including stress tests, have been reviewed by the Directors. The Group’s forecasts and projections show 
that it will be able to operate at adequate levels of both liquidity and capital for the foreseeable future, including a range of 
stressed scenarios, taking management actions into account as appropriate if the additional capital needed to continue the 
forecast growth strategy is not forthcoming. After making due enquiries, the Directors believe that the Group has sufficient 
resources to continue its activities for the foreseeable future and to continue its expansion, and the Group has sufficient 
capital to enable it to continue to meet its regulatory capital requirements as set out by the Prudential Regulation Authority 
(‘PRA’).

Employees

Our people are proud of the Bank we are building.

All new starters attend a centralised induction programme to ensure a consistent introduction to the Group. Each new 
starter is invited to a full day workshop in which they learn about our brand, values, approach to risk management, products 
and services.

We run a full communications programme targeted at all of our people, as well as bespoke programmes for managers and 
our senior leadership team. These programmes are orchestrated by an employee communications manager who reports into 
the central Corporate Affairs team and has direct access to the Executive Team.

Regular central communications are issued to all of our people, covering topics including our financial performance at key 
points throughout the year, as well as other strategic and HR-related updates. Channels include, although are not limited to, 
all employee emails, our intranet and Yammer.

In 2014, we refreshed our intranet to make it more user-friendly and bring it in line with our brand identity. As part of our 
commitment to transparency, key information has also been made more visible. For example, the intranet homepage now 
carries our Twitter feed, so that our people can follow external conversations we are involved in; recent examples of customer 
reviews from our Ratings & Reviews service, so that we can see what our customers are saying about us; and a feed from 
Yammer, to keep our people abreast of internal conversations.

We place a great deal of importance on ensuring that the lines of communication between our people and the Group’s 
leaders are two-way and transparent. We have continued our programme of Executive visits to our regional offices during 
which our people are able to meet and hear from senior members of the Aldermore team.

We hold an annual employee roadshow in which we bring our people together to update them on the Group’s vision. 
The roadshow also provides a forum for our people to pose questions to the Executive Team and to network with their 
colleagues. Roadshow events were held in Manchester, Leicester and Reading to enable all of our people to attend 
regardless of their geographical location. Following the roadshow, 88 per cent of people surveyed said that our Executive 
Team answered all of the questions put to them.

In early 2014, we conducted a pulse survey amongst employees which revealed that 84 per cent of respondents agreed that 
they received regular information from Aldermore that keeps them informed. We continue to make every effort to ensure that 
all of our people are aware of our strategy and understand the Group’s performance objectives as this drives our success.

We are committed to ensuring that disabled people are afforded equality of opportunity in respect to entering and 
continuing employment within the Group. This includes all stages from recruitment and selection, terms and conditions of 
employment, access to training and career development.

55

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic report Consolidated Directors’  
 report continued

The Group is committed to diversity and we work hard to ensure that all of our people are offered equal opportunities 
throughout their career with us. We are determined that nobody is discriminated against, directly or indirectly, on the basis 
of age, ethnic or national origin, religion or beliefs, sexual orientation, gender, marital status or disability.

Directors

Details of the Directors, including appointments and resignations during the financial year, and changes since the end of the 
financial year are provided on page 48 of the Corporate Governance section of the report.

Directors’ indemnities

Certain Directors benefited from qualifying third party indemnity provisions in place during the year ended 31 December 
2014 and at the date of this report.

The Group also purchased Directors, and officers, liabilities insurance during the year, which provides appropriate cover for 
legal actions brought against its Directors.

Significant contracts

Details of related party transactions are set out in Note 39.

Corporate responsibility

The Group’s corporate responsibilities activities are outlined on page 42.

Substantial shareholding

Aldermore Group PLC (the Parent Company) is controlled by AnaCap Financial Partners II, LP (52.3 per cent. of voting rights) 
and AnaCap Financial Partners, L.P. (47.7 per cent. of voting rights).

Political contributions

The Group made no political donations during the year (2013: £nil).

Research and development

The Group has a comprehensive product approval process and develops new products and services in each of its business 
divisions in the ordinary course of business. All new products, campaigns and business initiatives are reviewed and approved 
by the Group’s Product Committee.

Disclosure of information to Auditors

The Directors who held office at the date of approval of this Directors’ report confirm that, so far as they are aware, there is no 
relevant audit information of which the Group’s auditors are unaware; and each Director has taken all steps that he/she ought 
to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Group’s 
auditor is aware of that information.

Auditor

KPMG LLP have expressed their willingness to continue in office as auditors.

By order of the Board

Phillip Monks
Director

16 February 2015

56

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014 GovernanceStatement of Directors’ responsibilities 
in respect of the Strategic report, the 
Directors’ report and the financial statements

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Strategic report, the Directors’ report and the financial statements in 
accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and Parent Company financial statements for each financial year. 
Under that law they have elected to prepare both the Group and the Parent Company financial statements in accordance with 
IFRSs as adopted by the EU and applicable law.

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and 
fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and Parent Company and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each 
of the Group and Parent Company financial statements, the Directors are required to:

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent;

•  state whether they have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU; and

•  prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and the 

Parent Company will continue in business.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Parent 
Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and Parent 
Company and enable them to ensure that its financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They have general 
responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and 
detect fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the 
Company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ 
from legislation in other jurisdictions.

57

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportIndependent auditor’s report to the members of 
Aldermore Group PLC

We have audited the financial statements of Aldermore Group PLC for the year ended 31 December 2014 set out on pages 
59 to 126. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the EU and, as regards the Parent Company financial statements, as 
applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies 
Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are 
required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not 
accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members, as a body, for our audit 
work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

Respective responsibilities of Directors and auditor

As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement set out on page 57, the Directors are responsible for 
the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is 
to audit, and express an opinion on, the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards 
on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards 
for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements

A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements is provided on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at 
www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate.

Opinion on financial statements

In our opinion:

•  the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 

31 December 2014 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended; the Group financial statements have been properly 
prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU;

•  the Parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU and 

as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

Opinion on other matter prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion the information given in the Strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year for which the 
financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception

We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, 
in our opinion:

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 

received from branches not visited by us; or

•  the Parent Company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or

•  certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

Michael Peck (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor
Chartered Accountants 
15 Canada Square 
Canary Wharf 
London 
E14 5GL

16 February 2015

58

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsFinancial statements

Consolidated income statement
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Interest income

Interest expense

Net interest income

Fee and commission income

Fee and commission expense
Net (expense)/income from derivatives and other financial instruments at fair value 
through profit or loss

Gains on disposal of debt securities

Other operating income

Total operating income

Provisions

Costs in preparation for an initial public offering

Other administrative expenses

Administrative expenses

Depreciation and amortisation

Operating profit before impairment losses

Impairment losses on loans and advances to customers

Profit before taxation

Taxation (charge)/credit

Profit after taxation – attributable to equity holders of the Group

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

The notes and information on pages 63 to 120 form part of these financial statements. 
The result for the year is derived entirely from continuing activities.

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

 227,833 

 156,441 

 (87,618)

140,215 

 26,386 

 (7,819)

 (4,066)

 2,944 

 7,357 

 (75,799)

80,642 

23,555 

(7,529)

3,277 

1,869 

6,531 

165,017 

108,345 

(3,605)

(6,014)

(91,622)

(101,241)

(3,901)

59,875 

(9,570) 

50,305 

(11,871)

38,434 

16.4 

16.3 

(2,111)

– 

(65,252)

(67,363)

(3,822)

37,160 

(11,468)

25,692 

14 

25,706 

12.7 

12.6 

Note

5

6

7

8

9

10

32

14

15

20

17

18

18

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Profit after taxation 

Other comprehensive income/(expense):

Items that may subsequently be transferred to the income statement:

Available for sale debt securities:

Fair value movements 

Amounts transferred to the income statement

Taxation

Total other comprehensive income/(expense)

Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders of the Group

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

38,434 

25,706 

793 

3,456 

(2,465)

(198)

793 

39,227 

(2,566)

(1,490)

(1,869)

793 

(2,566)

23,140 

59

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic report31 December 
2014 
£’000

31 December 
2013 
£’000

Note

19

21

22

20

5

26

27

17

25

24

28

29

22

6

30

31

32

33

34

35

35

36

79,567 

117,401 

509,684 

8,168 

192,844 

237,544 

355,653 

8,872 

4,801,064 

3,373,844 

7,175 

3,344 

6,856 

6,598 

2,815 

– 

312 

5,109 

3,299 

2,858 

22,571 

22,657 

5,565,243 

4,202,992 

305,907 

385,951 

4,458,962 

3,464,018 

54,198 

1,528 

18,634 

21,107 

8,148 

2,008 

279,143 

36,758 

17,867 

– 

14,343 

16,236 

2,492 

1,157 

– 

35,571 

5,186,393 

3,937,635 

23,737 

23,737 

– 

237,305 

73,657 

2 

2,200 

1,375 

277,879 

– 

2 

2,200 

582 

1,531 

378,850 

265,357 

5,565,243 

4,202,992 

 Consolidated statement of financial position
As at 31 December 2014

Assets 

Cash and balances at central banks

Loans and advances to banks

Debt securities

Derivatives held for risk management

Loans and advances to customers

Fair value adjustment for portfolio hedged risk

Other assets

Prepayments and accrued income

Deferred taxation

Property, plant and equipment

Intangible assets

Total assets

Liabilities

Amounts due to banks

Customers' accounts

Derivatives held for risk management

Fair value adjustment for portfolio hedged risk

Other liabilities

Accruals and deferred income

Current taxation

Provisions

Debt securities in issue

Subordinated notes

Total liabilities

Share capital

Share premium account

Contingent convertible securities

Capital contribution reserve

Warrant reserve

Available for sale reserve

Retained earnings

Equity

Total liabilities and equity

These financial statements were approved by the Board and were signed on its behalf by:

Phillip Monks
Director

16 February 2015 
Registered number: 06764335

The notes and information on pages 63 to 120 form part of these financial statements.

60

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsConsolidated statement of cash flows
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Cash flows from operating activities

Profit before taxation
Adjustments for non-cash items and other adjustments included 
within the income statement

(Increase) in operating assets

Increase in operating liabilities

Income tax paid

Net cash flows (used in)/generated from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Purchase of debt securities

Proceeds from sale and maturity of debt securities

Capital repayments of debt securities

Interest received on debt securities

Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from issue of shares

Capital repayments on debt securities issued

Debt securities issuance costs

Proceeds from issue of debt securities

Issuance costs of contingent convertible securities

Proceeds from issue of contingent convertible securities

Interest paid on debt securities

Interest paid on subordinated notes

Net cash from financing activities

Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at start of the year

Movement during the year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

Note

50,305 

25,692 

37

37

37

(9,422)

18,002 

(1,487,787)

(1,320,852)

962,772 

1,571,927 

(9,712)

– 

(493,844) 

294,769 

(531,953)

346,183 

48,226 

11,229 

(5,400)

(89,071)

41,265 

23,893 

7,948 

(5,298)

(131,715) 

(21,263)

– 

63,165 

(52,840)

(2,086)

333,300 

(1,454)

75,111 

(2,513)

(5,150)

344,368 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(5,150)

58,015 

(281,191) 

331,521 

415,210 

83,689 

(281,191)

331,521 

134,019 

415,210 

37

37

61

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic report 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Share 
capital 
£’000

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000

Contingent 
convertible 
securities 
£’000

Capital 
contribution 
reserve 
£’000

Year ended 31 December 2014 
As at 1 January

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with equity holders:

– Reduction in share premium (Note 35)
–  Issuance of contingent convertible 

securities (Note 36)1

– Issuance costs

– Share based payments (Note 35)

As at 31 December
Year ended 31 December 2013 
As at 1 January

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with equity holders:

– Shares issued, net of expenses

– Share based payments (Note 35)

As at 31 December

23,737  237,305 

– 

– 

– 

(237,305)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

23,737 

– 

– 

– 

–

75,111 

(1,454)

– 

73,657 

19,918  177,959 

– 

– 

3,819 

59,346 

– 

– 

23,737  237,305 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

2 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

2 

2 

– 

– 

– 

2 

Warrant 
reserve 
£’000

2,200 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Available 
for sale 
reserve 
£’000

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

Total 
£’000

582 

793 

1,531  265,357 

38,434 

39,227 

–  237,305 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

75,111 

(1,454)

609 

609 

2,200 

1,375  277,879  378,850

2,200 

3,148 

(24,337) 178,890 

– 

– 

– 

(2,566)

25,706 

23,140 

– 

– 

– 

63,165 

162 

162 

2,200 

582 

1,531  265,357 

1 

 On 9 December 2014, Aldermore Group PLC (‘the Company’) raised £75.1 million of Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities. Further detail 
is provided in Note 36. 

62

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsNotes to the financial statements

1. Basis of preparation

(a) Accounting basis
The consolidated financial statements of Aldermore Group PLC (the ‘Company’) and its subsidiary undertakings (together, the 
‘Group’), including its principal subsidiary, Aldermore Bank PLC (the ‘Bank’). 

Both the Group consolidated financial statements and the Company financial statements have been prepared and approved by 
the Directors in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRSs’) as issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board (‘IASB’), and as adopted by the European Union. 

The Group prepared its annual consolidated financial statements under United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice 
(‘UK GAAP’) until 31 December 2013. UK GAAP differs in certain respects from IFRSs, hence when preparing these financial 
statements, management has amended certain accounting and valuation methods and accounts disclosures to comply with IFRSs. 
The significant accounting policies adopted are set out in Note 2.

The Group’s first set of IFRS financial statements for the six months ended 30 June 2014 was included in the information 
memorandum for the contingent convertible securities issued in December 2014 (see Note 36). The Group’s date of transition to 
IFRSs was 1 January 2011. The Group’s first set of IFRS financial statements, including the reconciliations required by IFRS 1, are 
available on the Group’s website www.investors.aldermore.co.uk.

By including the Company financial statements here together with the Group consolidated financial statements, the Company is 
taking advantage of the exemption in Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its individual income statement and 
related notes that form a part of these approved financial statements. 

The principal activity of the Company is that of an investment holding company. 

(b) Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and its subsidiaries which are entities 
controlled by the Company (jointly referred to as the Group) made up to 31 December each year. 

Control is achieved when the Company:

•  has power over the investee;

•  is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee; and

•  has the ability to use its power to affect its returns.

The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or 
more of the three elements of control listed above.

Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group and are deconsolidated from the date that 
control ceases. Uniform accounting policies are applied consistently across the Group. Intercompany transactions and balances are 
eliminated upon consolidation.

Securitisation vehicles
The Group has securitised certain loans and advances to customers by the transfer of the beneficial interest in such loans to 
securitisation vehicles (see Note 20). The securitisation enabled the subsequent issue of debt securities by a securitisation vehicle 
to investors who have the security of the underlying assets as collateral. The securitisation vehicles are fully consolidated into the 
Group’s accounts as the Group has control as defined above.

The transfer of the beneficial interest in these loans to the securitisation are not treated as sales by the Group. The Group continues 
to recognise these assets within its own Statement of Financial Position after the transfer as it continues to retain substantially all the 
risks and rewards from the assets.

(c) Going concern
The financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis, as the Directors are satisfied that the Group has the resources 
to continue in business for the foreseeable future (which has been taken as 12 months from the date of approval of the financial 
statements). In making this assessment, the Directors have considered a wide range of information relating to present and future 
conditions, including the current state of the balance sheet, future projections of profitability, cash flows and capital resources and 
the longer term strategy of the business. The Group’s capital and liquidity plans, including stress tests, have been reviewed by the 
Directors. The Group’s forecasts and projections show that it will be able to operate at adequate levels of both liquidity and capital 
for the foreseeable future, including a range of stressed scenarios, taking management actions into account as appropriate if the 
additional capital needed to continue the forecast growth strategy is not forthcoming. After making due enquiries, the Directors 
believe that the Group has sufficient resources to continue its activities for the foreseeable future and to continue its expansion, 
and the Group has sufficient capital to enable it to continue to meet its regulatory capital requirements as set out by the Prudential 
Regulation Authority (‘PRA’).

63

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

1. Basis of preparation continued

(d) Basis of measurement
The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis except for the following material items in the 
financial statements:

•  derivative financial instruments are measured at fair value through profit or loss;

•  debt securities designated at fair value through profit or loss;

•  available for sale debt securities are valued at fair value through other comprehensive income; and

•  fair value adjustments for portfolios of financial assets and financial liabilities designated as hedged items in qualifying fair value 

hedge relationships, which reflect changes in fair value attributable to the risk being hedged.

(e) Use of estimates and judgements
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the 
application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ 
from these estimates.

Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the 
period in which the estimates are revised and in any future periods affected.

Information about areas of estimation, uncertainty and critical judgements in applying accounting policies that have the most 
significant effect on the amounts recognised in the financial statements are included in Note 3.

(f) Future accounting developments
All standards or amendments to existing standards which have been endorsed by the European Union (‘EU’) and which are 
available for early adoption for annual periods commencing on or after 1 January 2014 have been adopted by the Group.

There are also a number of standards, amendments and interpretations which have been issued by the IASB but which have not 
yet been endorsed by the EU. The most significant of these is IFRS 9: ‘Financial Instruments’, the planned replacement for IAS 39: 
‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement.’

IFRS 9 introduces new requirements for the classification and measurement of financial assets, hedge accounting and the 
impairment of financial assets. Under IFRS 9 financial assets are classified and measured based on the business model under which 
they are held and the characteristic of their contractual cash flows. In addition, IFRS 9 is replacing the incurred loss approach to 
impairment of IAS 39 with one based on expected losses, and is replacing the rules based hedging requirements of IAS 39 with 
new requirements that align hedge accounting more closely with risk management activities.

IFRS 9, including the final version of the requirements in respect of impairment, was issued on 24 July 2014. The IASB has decided 
to apply IFRS 9 for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018. IFRS 9 is required to be applied retrospectively, but prior 
periods need not be restated. IFRS 9, including its commencement date, will be subject to endorsement by the EU. 

In addition, the IASB has commenced a separate project for macro hedging, which is exploring a new way to account for the 
dynamic risk management of open portfolios and is likely to be of future relevance to the Group. That project is still at the 
Discussion Paper stage and as yet the likely final form of any amendments to IFRS 9, or their required implementation date, is 
not clear. The adoption of IFRS 9 is expected to have a material impact on the Group’s financial statements. Work is ongoing to 
quantify the impact.

The changes in the approach to impairment would not be likely to have a significant impact on the Group’s impairment provisions 
in respect of specifically impaired loans or those loans where there has been a credit deterioration although the loans are not 
considered to be yet impaired, as the current impairment provisions on such loans are based on estimates of expected losses. 
In respect of other loans against which collective provisions are raised our current approach as explained in Note 3 is to estimate 
probabilities of defaults, and hence expected losses, for the next 12 months. This approach is similar to that which will be required 
under IFRS 9 except that in order to measure incurred losses, as required by IAS 39, we then adjust the calculated 12 month 
expected loss for an emergence period reflective of the underlying asset so as to reflect only the impairment which is considered to 
have been incurred at the reporting date.

The IASB has also issued IFRS 15: ‘Revenue from contracts with customers.’ The impact for the Group is currently being assessed. 
The Standard will be effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2017 with retrospective application 
subject to EU endorsement.

64

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements2. Significant accounting policies

(a) Interest income and expense
Interest income and expense are recognised in the income statement on an effective interest rate (‘EIR’) basis. The EIR is the 
rate that, at the inception of the financial asset or liability, exactly discounts expected future cash payments and receipts over 
the expected life of the instrument back to the initial carrying amount. When calculating the EIR, the Group estimates cash flows 
considering all contractual terms of the instrument (for example, prepayment options) but does not consider the assets’ future 
credit losses.

At each reporting date, management makes an assessment of the expected remaining life of its financial assets, including any 
acquired loan portfolios, and where there is a change in those assessments the remaining amount of any unamortised discount or 
premiums is adjusted so that the interest income continues to be recognised prospectively on the amortised cost of the financial 
asset at the original EIR. The adjustment arising is recognised within interest income in the income statement for the current period.

The calculation of the EIR includes all transaction costs and fees paid or received that are an integral part of the interest rate, 
together with the discounts or premium arising on the acquisition of loan portfolios. Transaction costs include incremental costs that 
are directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of a financial asset or liability.

Interest income and expense presented in the income statement include:

•  interest on financial assets and financial liabilities measured at amortised cost calculated on an EIR basis;

•  interest on available for sale debt securities calculated on an EIR basis;

•  interest income recognised on finance leases where the Group acts as the lessor (see Note 2(o));

•  the effective portion of fair value changes in qualifying hedging derivatives designated in fair value hedges of interest rate risk, 

together with changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk; and

•  interest income on financial assets designated at fair value so as to avoid an accounting mismatch with derivatives held as an 

‘economic’ hedge and the matching interest component of the derivative.

Interest income includes amounts the Group charges its Invoice Finance clients as interest each day on the balance of their 
outstanding loans. This interest income is recognised in the income statement on an EIR basis.

(b) Fee and commissions and other operating income
Fee and commission income
Fee and commission income includes fees relating to services provided to customers which do not meet the criteria for inclusion 
within interest income.

Within the Invoice Finance division of the Group, customers are charged a factoring fee for managing their sales ledgers. This fee 
is recognised within fee and commissions income over the period in which the ledger management service is provided. Other fee 
and commission income includes fees charged for valuations, documentation, mortgage services and arrears, and are recognised 
as the related services are performed.

Arrangement fees and others fees relating to loans and advances to customers are included within interest income as part of the 
EIR calculation.

Fee and commission expense
Fee and commission expense predominantly consists of introducer commissions, legal and valuation fees and company search 
fees. Where these fee and commissions are incremental costs that are directly attributable to the issue of a financial instrument, 
they are included in interest income as part of the EIR calculation. Where they are not incremental costs that are directly attributable 
they are recognised within fee and commission expense as the services are received.

Other operating income
Other operating income predominantly arises from the provision of Invoice Finance services and includes disbursements and 
collect out income. This income is recognised within other operating income when the service is provided.

(c) Net income from derivatives and other financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss
Net income from derivatives and other financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss relates to non-trading derivatives 
held for risk management purposes that do not form part of a qualifying hedging arrangement and financial assets designated at 
fair value through profit or loss. It includes all realised and unrealised fair value changes, interest and foreign exchange differences, 
with the exception of interest income on financial assets designated at fair value and the matching interest component of the 
hedging derivatives. The assets designated at fair value are treated in this manner so as to avoid an accounting mismatch with 
derivatives held as an ‘economic’ hedge.

65

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

2. Significant accounting policies continued

(d) Financial instruments – recognition and derecognition
(i) Recognition
The Group initially recognises loans and advances, amounts due to banks, customer accounts and subordinated notes issued on the 
date that they are originated.

Regular way purchases and sales of debt securities and derivatives are recognised on the trade date at which the Group commits to 
purchase or sell the asset. All other financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised on the trade date at which the Group becomes 
a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.

(ii) Derecognition
Financial assets are derecognised when they are qualifying transfers and:

•  the rights to receive cash flows from the assets have ceased; or

•  the Group has transferred substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the assets.

When a financial asset is derecognised in its entirety, the difference between the carrying amount and the sum of the consideration 
received (including any new asset obtained less any new liability assumed) and any cumulative gain or loss that had been recognised 
in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement.

When available for sale financial assets are derecognised, the cumulative gain or loss, including that previously recognised in reserves, 
is recognised in the income statement.

A financial liability is derecognised when the obligation is discharged, cancelled or expires. Any difference between the carrying 
amount of a financial liability derecognised and the consideration paid is recognised through the income statement.

(iii) Funding for Lending Scheme (‘FLS’)
Loans and advances over which the Group transfers its rights to the collateral thereon to the Bank of England under the FLS are 
not derecognised from the statement of financial position, as the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, 
including all cash flows arising from the loans and advances and exposure to credit risk. The treasury bills that the Group borrows 
against the transferred assets are not recognised in the statement of financial position, but where they are sold to third parties by the 
Group under agreements to repurchase, the cash received is recognised as an asset within the statement of financial position together 
with the corresponding obligation to return it which is recognised as a liability at amortised cost within ‘Due to banks’. Interest is 
accrued over the life of the agreement on an EIR basis.

(e) Financial assets 
(i) Overview
The Group classifies its financial assets (excluding derivatives) as either:

•  loans and receivables;

•  available for sale; or

•  financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss

(ii) Loans and receivables
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market 
and that the Group does not intend to sell immediately or in the near term. These are initially measured at fair value plus transaction 
costs that are directly attributable to the financial asset. Subsequently, these are measured at amortised cost using the EIR method. 
The amortised cost is the amount advanced less principal repayments, plus or minus the cumulative amortisation using the EIR 
method of any difference between the amount advanced and the maturity amount less impairment provisions for incurred losses. 
Loans and receivables mainly comprise loans and advances to banks and customers.

(iii) Available for sale
Available for sale financial assets are debt securities that are not held for trading and are intended to be held for an indefinite period 
of time. These are initially measured at fair value plus transaction costs that are directly attributable to the financial asset. Subsequently, 
they are measured at fair value based on current quoted bid prices in active markets for identical assets that the Group can access at 
the reporting date. Where there is no active market or the debt securities are unlisted the fair values are based on valuation techniques 
including discounted cash flow analysis, with reference to relevant market rates, and other commonly used valuation techniques. 
Interest income is recognised in the income statement using the EIR method. Impairment losses are recognised in the income 
statement. Other fair value changes are recognised in other comprehensive income and presented in the available for sale reserve in 
equity. On disposal, the gain or loss accumulated in equity is reclassified to the income statement.

(iv) Fair value assets designated at fair value through profit or loss
Financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss are assets which have been designated as such to eliminate or 
significantly reduce a measurement and recognition inconsistency or where management specifically manages an asset or liability on 
that basis. These assets are measured at fair value based on current quoted bid prices in active markets for identical assets that the 

66

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsGroup can access at the reporting date. Gains and losses arising from changes in the fair value are brought into the income statement 
within ‘Net income/(expense) from derivatives and other financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss’ as they arise.

(f) Financial liabilities
(i) Overview
Financial liabilities are contractual obligations to deliver cash or another financial asset. Financial liabilities are recognised initially 
at fair value, net of directly attributable transaction costs for financial liabilities other than derivatives. Financial liabilities, other than 
derivatives, are subsequently measured at amortised cost.

(ii) Financial liabilities at amortised cost
Financial liabilities at amortised cost are recognised initially at fair value, which equates to issue proceeds net of transaction costs 
incurred. They are subsequently stated at amortised cost. Any difference between proceeds net of transaction costs and the 
redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

(iii) Subordinated notes
Subordinated notes issued by the Group are assessed as to whether they should be treated as equity or financial liabilities. 
Where there is a contractual obligation to deliver cash or other financial assets, they are treated as a financial liability and measured 
at amortised cost using the EIR after taking account of any discount or premium on the issue and directly attributable costs that are 
an integral part of the EIR. The amount of any discount or premium is amortised over the period to the expected call date of the 
instrument. All subordinated notes issued by the Group are classified as financial liabilities; however, the warrants attached to the 
subordinated notes, which give the holders the right to subscribe for shares in Aldermore Group PLC (the ‘Parent Company’), have 
been included in equity as a warrant reserve at the residual value attributable to the warrants after deducting from the face value of 
the instrument as a whole the amounts determined separately as the fair value of the subordinated notes at the date of issue.

(g) Impairment – financial assets
(i) Assessment
At each reporting date the Group assesses its financial assets not at fair value through profit or loss as to whether there is objective 
evidence that the assets are impaired. Objective evidence that financial assets are impaired can include:

•  significant financial difficulty of the borrower;

•  a breach of contract such as default or delinquency in interest or principal repayments;

•  the granting of a concession for economic or legal reasons relating to the borrower’s financial condition that the Group would not 

otherwise grant;

•  indications that a borrower or issuer will enter bankruptcy or other financial reorganisation;

•  the disappearance of an active market for a debt security because of the issuer’s financial difficulties; or

•  national or local economic conditions that correlate with defaults within groups of financial assets e.g. increases in unemployment 

rates or decreases in property prices relating to the collateral held.

The Group considers evidence for the impairment of loans and advances at both the individual asset and collective level. In certain 
cases where a borrower is experiencing significant financial distress, the Group may use forbearance measures to assist them and 
militate against default. Any forbearance measures agreed are assessed on a case by case basis.

(ii) Scope
The Group considers evidence of impairment of financial assets at both an individual asset and collective level.

Individual impairment
All individually significant financial assets are assessed for individual impairment using a range of risk criteria. Those found not to be 
individually impaired are then collectively assessed for any impairment that has been incurred but not yet identified.

Assets are considered to be individually impaired where they meet one or more of the following criteria:

•  a default position equivalent to three or more missed monthly repayments (or a quarterly payment which is over 30 days 

past due);

•  litigation proceedings have commenced;

•  act of insolvency, e.g. bankruptcy, administration or liquidation, or appointment of an LPA Receiver;

•  invoice finance accounts are classified as in default when there is cessation of additional advances and/or when the facility is in 

collect out; or

•  where there is evidence of fraud.

67

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

2. Significant accounting policies continued

Collective impairment
All financial assets that are not found to be individually impaired are collectively assessed for impairment by grouping together 
financial assets with similar risk characteristics.

(iii) Measurement
Impairment provisions on financial assets individually identified as impaired are calculated as the difference between the carrying 
amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the asset’s original EIR.

When assessing collective impairment, the Group estimates incurred losses using a statistical model which multiplies the probability 
of default (‘PD’) for each class of customer (using external credit rating information) by the loss given default (‘LGD’) multiplied by 
the estimated exposure at default (‘EaD’) to arrive at the projected expected loss. An emergence period is subsequently applied to 
the projected expected loss to determine the estimated level of incurred losses at each reporting date. In addition an adjustment is 
made to discount the imputed cash flows from the model at the assets’ original EIR to arrive at the recorded collective provisions. 
The model’s results are adjusted for management’s judgement as to whether current economic and credit conditions are such that 
actual losses are likely to differ from those suggested by historical modelling.

In assessing the level of collective impairment provisions, the Group uses statistical modelling of historical trends of probability 
of default, the timing of recoveries and the amount of loss incurred, adjusted for management’s judgement as to whether current 
economic and credit conditions are such that actual losses are likely to be greater or less than suggested by historical trends. 
Default rates, loss rates and the expected timing of future recoveries are benchmarked against actual outcomes to ensure they 
remain appropriate.

Impairment losses are recognised immediately in the income statement and a corresponding reduction in the value of the financial 
asset is recognised through the use of an allowance account.

A write-off is made when all or part of a financial asset is deemed uncollectible or forgiven after all collection procedures have 
been completed and the amount of the loss has been determined. Write-offs are charged against amounts previously reflected 
in the allowance account or directly to the income statement. Any additional amounts recovered after a financial asset has been 
previously written off are offset against the write-off charge in the income statement once they are received. Allowances for 
impairment losses are released at the point when it is deemed that, following a subsequent event, the risk has reduced such that an 
allowance is no longer required.

Interest on impaired financial assets is recognised at the same EIR as applied at the initial recognition of the financial asset but 
applied to the book value of the financial asset net of any individual impairment allowances that have been raised.

(iv) Impairment of financial assets classified as available for sale
Impairment losses on available for sale debt securities are recognised by reclassifying the losses accumulated in the available 
for sale reserve in equity to the income statement. The cumulative loss that is reclassified from equity to the income statement is 
the difference between the acquisition cost, net of any principal repayment and amortisation, and the current fair value, less any 
impairment loss recognised previously in the income statement. Changes in impairment provisions attributable to the effective 
interest method are reflected as a component of interest income.

If in a subsequent period the fair value of an impaired available for sale debt security increases and the increase can be related 
objectively to an event occurring after the impairment loss was recognised, then the impairment loss is reversed.

(h) Financial instruments – fair value measurement
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market 
participants at the measurement date in the principal, or in its absence, the most advantageous market to which the Group has 
access at that date. The fair value of a liability reflects its non-performance risk.

When applicable, the Group measures the fair value of an instrument using the quoted price in an active market for that instrument. 
A market is regarded as active if transactions for the asset or liability take place with sufficient frequency and volume to provide 
pricing on an ongoing basis.

When there is no quoted price in an active market, the Group uses valuation techniques that maximise the use of relevant 
observable inputs and minimises the use of unobservable inputs. The chosen valuation techniques incorporate all the factors that 
market participants would take into account in pricing a transaction.

The best evidence of fair value of a financial instrument at initial recognition is normally the transaction price – i.e. the fair value of 
the consideration received or given.

If an asset measured at fair value has a bid and an offer price, the Group measures assets and long positions at a bid price and 
liabilities at an offer price.

68

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements(i) Derivative financial instruments
The Group enters into derivative transactions only for the purpose of reducing exposures to fluctuations in interest rates, exchange 
rates and market indices; they are not used for proprietary trading purposes.

Derivatives are carried at fair value with movements in fair values recorded in the income statement. Derivative financial instruments 
are principally valued by discounted cash flow models using yield curves that are based on observable market data or are based 
on valuations obtained from counterparties. As the Group’s derivatives are covered by master netting agreements with the Group’s 
counterparties, with any net exposures then being further covered by the payment or receipt of periodic cash margins, the Group 
has used a risk free discount rate for the determination of their fair values.

All derivatives are classified as assets where their fair value is positive and liabilities where their fair value is negative. Where there 
is the current legal ability and intention to settle net, then the derivative is classified as a net asset or liability, as appropriate. 
Where cash collateral is received, to mitigate the risk inherent in amounts due to the Group, it is included as a liability within 
‘Amounts due to banks’. Where cash collateral is given, to mitigate the risk inherent in amounts due from the Group, it is included 
as an asset in ‘Loans and advances to banks’.

(j) Hedge accounting
The Group designates certain derivatives held for risk management as hedging instruments in qualifying hedging relationships. 
On initial designation of the hedge, the Group formally documents the relationship between the hedging instruments and hedged 
items, including the risk management objective, the strategy in undertaking the hedge and the method that will be used to assess 
the effectiveness of the hedging relationship. The Group makes an assessment both at the inception of the hedge relationship as 
well as on an ongoing basis, as to whether the hedging instruments are expected to be highly effective in offsetting the changes in 
the fair value of the respective hedged items during the period for which the hedge is designated.

Fair value hedge accounting for a portfolio hedge of interest rate risk
The Group has applied fair value hedge accounting for a portfolio hedge of interest rate risk for the first time, starting on 
1 January 2014. As part of its risk management process the Group identifies portfolios whose interest rate risk it wishes to hedge. 
The portfolios comprise either only assets or only liabilities. The Group analyses each portfolio into repricing time periods based 
on expected repricing dates, by scheduling cash flows into the periods in which they are expected to occur. Using this analysis, the 
Group designates as the hedged item an amount of assets or liabilities from each portfolio that it wishes to hedge.

The Group measures monthly the change in fair value of the portfolio relating to the interest rate risk that is being hedged. 
Provided that the hedge has been highly effective, the Group recognises the change in fair value of each hedged item in the 
income statement with the cumulative movement in their value being shown on the statement of financial position as a separate 
item, ‘Fair value adjustment for portfolio hedged risk’, either within assets or liabilities as appropriate. This amount is amortised on a 
straight line basis to the income statement over the remaining average useful life of the original hedge relationship, from the month 
in which it is first recognised.

The Group measures the fair value of each hedging instrument monthly. The value is included in derivative financial instruments in 
either assets or liabilities as appropriate, with the change in value recorded in the income statement. Any hedge ineffectiveness is 
recognised in the income statement as the difference between the change in fair value of the hedged item and the change in fair 
value of the hedging instrument.

(k) Embedded derivatives
A derivative may be embedded in another instrument, known as the host contract. Where the economic characteristics and risks 
of an embedded derivative are not closely related to those of the host contract (and the host contract is not carried at fair value 
through profit or loss), the embedded derivative is separated from the host and held on the statement of financial position with 
derivatives held for risk management at fair value. Movements in fair value are posted to the income statement, whilst the host 
contract is accounted for according to the relevant accounting policy for that particular asset or liability. 

Embedded derivatives contained within equity instruments are considered separately. The embedded derivative on the contingent 
convertible securities is not separated as the Group has an accounting policy not to separate a feature that has already been 
considered in determining that the entire issue is a non-derivative equity instrument. 

69

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

2. Significant accounting policies continued

(l) Property, plant and equipment
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost or deemed cost at transition to IFRSs, less accumulated depreciation and 
any provision for impairment. Cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition of the asset or costs incurred 
in bringing the asset to use. Depreciation is provided on all property, plant and equipment, at rates calculated to write off the cost 
of each asset to realisable values on a straight line basis over its expected useful life, as follows:

•  fixtures, fittings and equipment 

five years

•  computer hardware 

one to five years

Purchased software that is integral to the functionality of the related equipment is capitalised as part of that equipment. 
Equipment held for use in operating leases is written down to its estimated residual value on a straight line basis over the period of 
the underlying lease agreement.

(m) Intangible assets
Goodwill
Goodwill is stated at cost or deemed cost at transition to IFRSs, less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is not amortised 
but is tested for impairment on an annual basis. Where impairment is required, the amount is recognised in the income statement 
and cannot be subsequently reversed.

Computer systems
Software acquired by the Group is measured at cost less accumulated amortisation and any accumulated impairment losses.

Expenditure on internally developed software is recognised as an asset when the Group is able to demonstrate its intention and 
ability to complete the development and use the software in a manner that will generate future economic benefits, and can reliably 
measure the costs to complete the development. The capitalised costs of internally developed software include all costs directly 
attributable to developing the software, and are amortised over its useful life. Internally developed software is stated at capitalised 
cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment.

Software is amortised on a straight line basis in the income statement over its useful life, from the date that it is available for use. 
The estimated useful life of software is one to five years.

(n) Impairment of non-financial assets
The carrying amounts of the Group’s non-financial assets are reviewed at least annually to determine whether there is any indication 
of impairment. If any such indication exists, then the assets recoverable amount is estimated.

Goodwill
Goodwill is tested for impairment at least annually. For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to divisions. 
An impairment loss is recognised if the carrying amount of a division exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount of 
a division is the greater of its value in use and its fair value less costs to sell. The estimation of recoverable value is based on value 
in use calculations incorporating forecasts by management of post-tax profits for the subsequent five years, and a residual value, 
discounted at a risk-adjusted interest rate appropriate to the cash generating unit.

Where impairment is required, the amount is recognised in the income statement and cannot be subsequently reversed.

Intangible assets
If impairment is indicated, the asset’s recoverable amount (being the greater of fair value less costs to sell and value in use) is 
estimated. Value in use is calculated by discounting the future cash flows from continuing use of the asset. If the carrying value 
of the asset is less than the greater of the value in use and the fair value less costs to sell, an impairment loss is recognised in the 
income statement.

An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would 
have been determined, net of depreciation or amortisation, if no impairment loss had been recognised.

(o) Assets leased to customers
All leases of assets to customers are finance leases as defined by IAS 17. When assets are leased to customers under finance leases, 
the present value of the lease payments is recognised as a receivable. The difference between the gross receivable and the present 
value of the receivable is recognised as unearned finance income. Lease income is recognised, within interest income in the income 
statement, over the term of the lease using the net investment method (before tax), which reflects a constant periodic rate of return 
ignoring tax cash flows.

(p) Assets leased from third parties
Leases where the lessor retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as operating leases. 
Payments made under operating leases, net of any incentives received from the lessor, are charged to the income statement, within 
administrative expenses or staff costs (in the case of company cars), on a straight line basis over the period of the lease. The Group 
holds no assets under finance leases.

70

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements 
 
 
(q) Provisions
A provision is recognised if, as a result of a past event, the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation that can be 
estimated reliably, and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation. 

The Group has an obligation to contribute to the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (‘FSCS’) to enable the FSCS to meet 
compensation claims from, in particular, retail depositors of failed banks. A provision is recognised to the extent it can be reliably 
estimated and when the Group has an obligation in accordance with IAS 37. The amount provided is based on information 
received from the FSCS, forecast future interest rates and the Group’s historic share of industry protected deposits. 

(r) Foreign currencies
Transactions in foreign currencies are recorded using the rate of exchange ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets 
and liabilities held at the balance sheet date are translated into sterling at the exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. 
Exchange differences are charged or credited to the income statement.

(s) Taxation
Taxation comprises current and deferred tax, which is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to 
items recognised directly in equity or in other comprehensive income.

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on taxable income or loss for the period, using tax rates enacted or 
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is recognised in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial 
reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. Deferred tax is not recognised for:

•  temporary differences on the initial recognition of assets or liabilities in a transaction that is not a business combination and that 

affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss;

•  temporary differences related to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that it is probable that they will not reverse in the 

foreseeable future; and

•  taxable temporary differences arising on the initial recognition of goodwill.

The measurement of deferred tax reflects the tax consequences that would follow the manner in which the Group expects at the 
end of the reporting period, to recover or settle the carrying amount of its assets and liabilities. Deferred tax is measured using tax 
rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which 
the asset can be utilised. Deferred tax assets are reviewed at each reporting date and are reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that the related tax benefit will be realised.

(t) Pension costs
The cost of providing retirement benefits is charged to the income statement at the amount of the defined contributions payable 
for each year. Differences between contributions payable and those actually paid are shown as accruals or prepayments. The Group 
has no defined benefit pension scheme.

(u) Shareholders’ funds
(i) Capital instruments
The Company classifies capital instruments as financial liabilities or equity instruments in accordance with the substance of the 
contractual terms of the instruments. Where an instrument contains no obligation on the Company to deliver cash or other financial 
assets or to exchange financial assets or financial liabilities with another party under conditions that are potentially unfavourable 
to the Group, or where the instrument will or may be settled in the Company’s own equity instruments but includes no obligation 
to deliver a variable number of the Company’s own equity instruments then it is treated as an equity instrument. Accordingly, 
the Company’s share capital, contingent convertible securities and warrants represented by the warrant reserve are presented 
as components of equity within shareholders’ funds. Any dividends, interest or other distributions on capital instruments are 
recognised in equity. Related income tax is accounted for in accordance with IAS 12.

(ii) Share premium
Share premium is the amount by which the fair value of the consideration received exceeds the nominal value of the shares issued.

(v) Capital raising costs
Costs directly incremental to the raising of share capital are netted against the share premium account. Costs directly incremental to 
the raising of convertible securities included in equity are offset against the proceeds from the issue within equity.

71

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

2. Significant accounting policies continued

(w) Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprises cash balances and balances with a maturity of three months or less from the acquisition date, 
which are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.

(x) Investment in Group undertakings
Investments in Group undertakings are initially recognised at cost. At each reporting date, an assessment is made as to 
whether there is any indication that the investment may be impaired. If such an indication exists, the Company estimates the 
investment’s recoverable amount. The investment is written down to the recoverable amount if this is lower than its carrying value. 
The impairment loss is recognised in the income statement.

(y) Warrants
The Company’s subsidiary, Aldermore Bank PLC, has issued subordinated notes with an attached warrant. The warrant gives the 
holders the right to subscribe for shares in the Company. The value attributable to these warrants has been reflected in an increase 
in the investment in Group undertakings and has been included in equity as a warrant reserve.

(z) Share based payment transactions
Employees (including senior Executives) of the Group may receive remuneration in the form of share based payment transactions, 
whereby employees can purchase equity instruments in Aldermore Group PLC, the Group’s Parent Company (‘equity-settled 
transactions’). The consideration paid for the equity instruments was in some cases below the fair value at the transaction date. 
The fair value of these transactions is determined at the transaction date and is recognised, together with a corresponding increase 
in equity, over the period in which the performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled, ending on the date on which the relevant 
employees become fully entitled to the award. 

The expense recognised in the income statement for the period represents the movement in cumulative expense recognised at 
the beginning and end of that period. Where the Group’s Parent grants equity instruments to the Group’s employees, which are 
accounted for as equity settled in the consolidated accounts of the parent, the Group accounts for these share based payments as 
equity settled. Further details of share based payments are provided in Note 35.

The share based payment transactions are recognised as an investment in Group undertakings with an associated credit to the 
share based payment reserve within the Parent Company standalone financial statements. 

3. Use of estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial information requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect the 
application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ 
from these estimates.

Estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in 
which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected. The judgements and assumptions that are considered to be the 
most important to the portrayal of the Group’s financial condition are those relating to loan impairment provisions, EIRs, contingent 
liabilities, the classification of contingent convertible securities and intangible assets.

(a) Loan impairment provisions
Loan portfolios across all divisions of the Group are reviewed on at least a monthly basis to assess for impairment. In determining 
whether an impairment provision should be recorded, judgements are made as to whether there is objective evidence that a 
financial asset or portfolio of financial assets is impaired as a result of loss events that occurred after recognition of the asset and 
by the reporting date. The calculation of impairment loss is management’s best estimate of losses incurred in the portfolio at the 
balance sheet date and reflects expected future cash flows based on both the likelihood of a loan or advance being written off and 
the estimated loss on such a write-off.

At 31 December 2014 gross loans and advances to customers totalled £4,824 million (31 December 2013: £3,395 million) 
against which impairment allowances of £23 million (31 December 2013: £21 million) had been made (see Note 20). The Group’s 
accounting policy for loan impairment provisions on financial assets classified as loans and receivables is described in Note 2(g). 
Impairment allowances are made up of two components, those determined individually against specific assets and those 
determined collectively. Of the impairment allowance of £23 million at 31 December 2014, £14 million relates to individual 
provisions and £9 million relates to collective provisions. The section below provides details of the critical elements of judgement 
within the loan impairment calculations. Less significant judgements are not disclosed.

Individual
Individual impairment allowances are established against the Group’s individually significant financial assets that are deemed 
by management to be impaired. The determination of individual impairment allowances requires the exercise of considerable 
judgement by management involving matters such as local economic conditions, the financial status of the customer and the 
realisable value of the security held. The actual amount of the future cash flows and their timing may differ significantly from the 
assumptions made for the purposes of determining the impairment allowances and consequently these allowances can be subject 
to variation as time progresses and the circumstances of the customer become clearer.

72

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsCollective
The collective impairment allowance is also subject to estimation uncertainty and in particular is sensitive to changes in economic 
and credit conditions, including the interdependency of house prices, unemployment rates, interest rates, borrowers’ behaviour 
and consumer bankruptcy trends. All of these factors can influence the key assumptions detailed below. It is, however, inherently 
difficult to estimate how changes in one or more of these factors might impact the collective impairment allowance.

The key assumptions used in the collective model are: probability of default (‘PD’), the loss given default (‘LGD’) and the loss 
emergence period (‘EP’) (the time between a trigger event occurring and the loans being identified as individually impaired). 
An additional element is included within the collective provision to reflect fraud losses that are incurred as at the reporting date 
but are yet to be individually impaired. Further details in respect of assumptions and details of the sensitivity of the estimate of the 
impairment allowance to changes in significant assumptions are as follows:

Probability of default:
The PD is based on external individual customer credit rating information updated for each reporting date. This external credit 
rating information gives a PD in the next 12 months where ‘default’ is defined as loans which are 2 months or more in arrears 
‘2 MIA’ and incorporates credit information from a broad range of financial services products for each customer.

Management make an estimate so as to adjust the external data to reflect both the individual nature of the Group’s lending and the 
Group’s policy of classifying loans which are 3 months or more in arrears (‘3 MIA’) as ‘impaired’. This adjustment is achieved by using 
two management assumptions: firstly a ‘roll rate’ that reflects how many of the loans which fall into 2 MIA will also fall into 3 MIA; 
and secondly a scalar that adjusts the external PDs to reflect the individual nature of the Group’s lending.

•  A 10 per cent absolute increase in the ‘roll rate’ assumed by management between 2 MIA and 3 MIA (e.g. a PD increasing from 

50 per cent. to 60 per cent.), when the loans are considered to be individually impaired would increase the impairment allowance 
by £0.4 million.

•  A 10 per cent relative reduction in the scaling factors applied to external data in order to arise at PDs appropriate to the 

individual nature of lending being undertaken would increase the impairment allowance by £0.5 million.

Loss given default
The model calculates the LGD from the point of repossession. Not all cases that are 3 MIA will reach repossession. 
Management therefore adjust the model by applying an assumption of the percentage of accounts 3 MIA that will 
reach repossession.

•  A 10 per cent absolute reduction in this assumption would decrease the impairment allowance by £0.8 million.

The LGD is also sensitive to the application of the House Price Index (‘HPI’) and Forced Sale Discount (‘FSD’) which affect the 
underlying value of the collateral which is expected to be received.

•  A 10 per cent relative reduction in the HPI would increase the overall impairment allowance by £1.2 million.

•  A five per cent absolute increase in the FSD would increase the overall impairment provision by £0.9 million.

Emergence period
Management make a judgement, according to the line of business for the underlying loans, on the length of emergence period to 
apply to the estimated losses expected to be recognised in the next 12 months in order to determine those which are considered 
as incurred as at the reporting date.

• A three month increase in all emergence periods would increase the overall impairment allowance by £3.3 million.

(b) Effective interest rate
IAS 39 requires interest earned from mortgages to be measured under the EIR method, as described in Note 2(a). 
Management must therefore use judgement to estimate the expected life of each type of instrument and hence the expected 
cash flows relating to it. The accuracy of the EIR would therefore be affected by unexpected market movements resulting in altered 
customer behaviour, inaccuracies in the models used compared to actual outcomes and incorrect assumptions.

A critical estimate in determining EIRs is the expected lives to maturity of the Group’s commercial and residential mortgage 
portfolios, as a change in the estimates will have an impact on the period over which the directly attributable costs and fees, and 
any discount received on the acquisition of the mortgage loan portfolios, are recognised. An extension of the estimated expected 
lives for a period of six months would have the effect of reducing the cumulative profit before tax recognised as at 31 December 
2014 by £2.4 million (31 December 2013: £2.4 million).

73

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

3. Use of estimates and judgements continued

(c) Contingent liabilities
As outlined in Note 32 and 38, the Group has made certain judgements and estimates about the extent of any customer redress for 
aspects of non-compliance with certain areas of detailed laws and regulations including the Customer Credit Act. The judgements 
and estimates made represent the best estimate of the Directors based on information available including legal advice. 
Further details are outlined in Note 32 and 38.

(d) Classification of contingent convertible securities
The Group issued £75 million of Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (‘the 
Securities’) during the year (see Note 36 for further detail). 

The Securities (net of the associated issuance costs) have been classified as equity within the statement of financial position. 
The decision to classify the Securities as equity (as opposed to debt) required management to consider the individual terms 
attached to the Securities, including the conversion clauses. This involved obtaining external legal and professional advice. 

The Group is not required to make payments under any circumstances, other than on a winding up. The Securities are convertible 
into ordinary shares of the Company in the event of the Group’s Common Equity Tier 1 ratio falling below 7 per cent. Subject to 
circumstances which are within the Company’s control, conversion can only be for a fixed number of the Company’s ordinary shares. 
The Securities impose no obligation on the Group to deliver cash or other financial benefit to security holders because they are 
perpetual, with no fixed redemption or maturity date and interest is due and payable only at the sole and absolute discretion of the 
Company. Furthermore, interest is non-cumulative. 

After consideration of all of the terms and the external advice received, management concluded that the Securities should be 
classified as equity in accordance with IAS 32: Financial instruments.

(e) Intangible assets
The Group assesses its intangible assets at least annually for evidence of impairment. Where the asset is under development, the 
Group considers whether it is reasonably likely to complete the asset and bring it into use. The Group also considers if the asset will 
generate sufficient economic benefit over and above the current carrying value of the asset. These considerations have resulted in a 
write-off of £1.6 million during the year. 

4. Segmental information

The Group has four reportable operating segments as described below which are based on the Group’s four lending divisions 
plus Central Functions. Each segment offers groups of similar products and services and are managed separately based on the 
Group’s internal reporting structure. Residential and SME Commercial Mortgages are operated under a single management team 
and supported by a single IT platform. However, the characteristics of the two businesses are sufficiently different and accordingly 
the segments are reported separately to the Board. Therefore, the two businesses represent separate operating segments in 
accordance with IFRS 8. 

For each of the reportable segments the Board, which is the Group’s Chief Operating Decision Maker, reviews internal 
management reports on a monthly basis. The following summary describes the operations in each of the Group’s 
reportable segments:

•  Residential Mortgages – Prime residential mortgages targeting underserved segments of creditworthy borrowers that provide 

attractive and sustainable margins and residential buy-to-let mortgages.

•  SME Commercial Mortgages – Property finance needs of professional, residential/commercial property investors, and owner-

occupier SMEs. Targets prime and specialist prime segments with loan sizes below £5 million.

•  Asset Finance – Lease and hire purchase financing for SMEs, focusing on sectors with strong returns and liquid secondary 

asset markets.

•  Invoice Finance – Simple factoring/discounting facility and credit control for SMEs, targeting owner managed businesses.

Central Functions represent the reconciling items between the total of the four reportable operating segments and the 
consolidated income statement. As well as common costs, Central Functions includes the Group’s Treasury and Savings 
functions which are responsible for raising finance on behalf of the operating segments. The costs of raising finance are all 
recharged by Central Functions to operating segments, apart from those costs relating to the subordinated notes (Note 6) 
and net expense/income from derivatives held at fair value.

Common costs are incurred on behalf of the operating segments and typically represent savings administration costs, back 
office costs and support function costs such as Finance, Risk and Human Resources. The costs are not directly attributable to 
the operating segments. 

74

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsInformation regarding the results of each reportable segment and their reconciliation to the total results of the Group are included 
below. Performance is measured based on the segmental result as included in the internal management reports.

Segmental information for the year ended 31 December 2014

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

Interest income – external customers

106,924 

56,215 

Interest expense – external customers

– 

– 

Asset 
Finance1 
£’000

56,684 

– 

Invoice 
Finance 
£’000

9,276 

– 

(43,427)

(14,663)

(19,749)

(3,327)

Central 
Functions1 
£’000

(1,266)

(87,618)

81,166 

Total  
£’000

227,833 

(87,618)

– 

Interest (expense)/income – internal 
Net fees and other income – external 
customers

Total operating income
Administrative expenses including 
depreciation and amortisation
Impairment losses on loans and advances 
to customers

Segmental result

Tax 

Profit after tax

Assets

Liabilities

4,109 

67,606 

1,518 

43,070 

3,064 

39,999 

17,543 

23,492 

(1,432)

24,802 

(9,150) 

165,017 

(9,551)

(6,865)

(11,878)

(14,712)

(62,136)

(105,142)

(1,252)

56,803 

(2,246)

33,959 

(2,661)

25,460 

(3,411)

5,369 

– 

(71,286) 

(9,570)

50,305 

(11,871) 

38,434 

2,564,899 

1,011,291 

1,044,298 

180,576 

764,179 

5,565,243 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(5,186,393)

(5,186,393)

Net assets/(liabilities)

2,564,899 

1,011,291 

1,044,298 

180,576 

(4,422,214) 

378,850 

1  A £1,628,000 write-off in relation to an Asset Finance intangible asset has been recorded within Central Functions as the asset was under construction at the time of write-off.

Segmental information for the year ended 31 December 2013

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

Interest income – external customers

66,670 

39,910 

37,375 

Interest expense – external customers

– 

– 

– 

Invoice 
Finance 
£’000

9,379 

– 

(34,920)

(14,562)

(14,360)

(4,318)

Central 
Functions 
£’000

3,107 

(75,799)

68,160 

Total  
£’000

156,441 

(75,799)

– 

Interest (expense)/income – internal 
Net fees and other income – external 
customers

Total operating income
Administrative expenses including 
depreciation and amortisation
Impairment losses on loans and advances 
to customers

Segmental result

Tax 

Profit after tax

Assets

Liabilities

2,875 

34,625 

89 

25,437 

1,992 

25,007 

17,861 

22,922 

4,886 

354 

27,703 

108,345 

(6,944)

(4,792)

(9,501)

(13,993)

(35,955)

(71,185)

(1,261)

26,420 

(1,965)

18,680 

(2,585)

12,921 

(5,657)

3,272 

– 

(35,601)

(11,468)

25,692 

14 

25,706 

1,679,686 

761,998 

720,198 

211,962 

829,148 

4,202,992 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(3,937,635)

(3,937,635)

Net assets/(liabilities)

1,679,686 

761,998 

720,198 

211,962 

(3,108,487)

265,357 

75

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

5. Interest income

On financial assets not at fair value through profit or loss:

On loans and advances to customers 

On loans and advances to banks 

On debt securities

On financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

Net interest expense on financial instruments hedging assets

Net interest income on debt securities designated at fair value 

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

227,758 

153,676 

1,548 

5,105 

1,206 

3,818 

234,411 

158,700 

(12,128)

5,550 

(7,970)

5,711 

227,833 

156,441 

Included within interest income on loans and advances to customers for the year ended 31 December 2014 is a total of £2,029,000 
(31 December 2013: £957,000) relating to impaired financial advances.

Included within net interest income on financial instruments hedging assets are fair value losses of £8,758,000 
(31 December 2013: £nil) on derivatives held in qualifying fair value hedging arrangements, together with gains of £7,175,000 
(31 December 2013: £nil) representing changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged interest rate risk on 
loans and advances to customers.

6. Interest expense

On financial liabilities not at fair value through profit or loss:

On customers’ accounts 

On amounts due to banks

On debt securities in issue

On subordinated notes

On financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

Net interest income on financial instruments hedging liabilities

Other

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

80,035 

1,522 

3,281 

6,338 

91,176 

(4,785)

1,227 

87,618 

70,411 

1,822 

– 

6,121 

78,354 

(3,678)

1,123 

75,799 

Included within net interest expense on financial instruments hedging assets are fair value gains of £1,649,000 
(31 December 2013: £nil) on derivatives held in qualifying fair value hedging arrangements together with losses of £1,528,000 
(31 December 2013: £nil) representing changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged interest rate risk on 
customers’ accounts.

7. Fee and commission income

Invoice finance fees

Insurance commissions receivable

Other

Details of ‘other’ fee and commission income are provided in Note 2 (b).

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

14,546 

14,949 

601 

11,239 

26,386 

1,221 

7,385 

23,555 

76

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements8. Fee and commission expense

Introducer commissions

Legal and valuation fees

Company searches and other fees

Credit protection and insurance charges

Insurance commissions payable

9.  Net (expense)/income from derivatives and other financial instruments 

at fair values through profit or loss

Net (losses)/gains on derivatives 

Net gains/(losses) on assets designated at fair value through profit or loss

Net gains on available for sale assets held in fair value hedges

Less: realised gains transferred to gains on disposal of debt securities

10. Other operating income

Disbursements, collect out and other invoice finance income

Other

11. Staff costs

Wages and salaries

Social security costs

Other pension costs

2014 
£’000

1,932 

2,467 

1,815 

1,154 

451 

7,819 

2013 
£’000

1,962 

1,688 

2,296 

762 

821 

7,529 

2014 
£’000

(17,278)

9,537 

4,068 

(393)

2013 
£’000

13,993 

(10,716)

– 

–

(4,066) 

3,277 

2014 
£’000

7,066 

291 

7,357 

2013 
£’000

6,344 

187 

6,531 

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

43,248 

33,684 

5,009 

1,157 

3,905 

835 

49,414 

38,424 

The average number of persons employed by the Group during the year, including Non-Executive Directors, was 764 
(31 December 2013: 621).

12. Remuneration of Directors 

Directors’ emoluments

Compensation for loss of office

Contributions to money purchase scheme

2014 
£’000

2,797 

20 

61 

2013 
£’000

2,747 

195 

60 

2,878 

3,002 

Compensation for loss of office in 2014 of £20,000 (2013: £195,000) relates to two Directors (2013: two Directors) and includes 
£nil (2013: £nil) pension plan contribution. In addition, in the prior year, the Group’s controlling party repurchased those Directors’ 
shares in the Company for an amount which was £94,000 in excess of the initial purchase price.

The Group made payments of £24,000 to two Directors’ individual personal pension plans during the year (2013: £25,000, 
two Directors).

77

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

12. Remuneration of Directors continued

During 2014 one Director was given the option to purchase B ordinary shares of £0.10 and two Directors were given the option 
to purchase C ordinary shares of £0.0001 in the ultimate Parent Company, Aldermore Group PLC, at a discount to market value. 
455,021 discounted B ordinary shares were purchased and 17,985,919 discounted C ordinary shares were purchased (2013: one 
Director, 303,347 B ordinary shares). The shares issued in the year give rise to a benefit of £408,000 (2013: £61,000). A charge of 
£555,000 has been recognised in the year in relation to the total share based payments amount.

Highest paid Director
The above amounts include the following in respect of the highest paid Director:

Emoluments

Contributions to money purchase scheme

Share based payments

2014 
£’000

703 

20 

4 

727 

2013 
£’000

653 

10 

61 

724

13. Pension and other post-retirement benefit commitments

The Group operates two defined contribution pension schemes. The assets of the schemes are held separately from those of the 
Group in independently administered funds. Pension contributions of £1,157,000 (31 December 2013: £835,000) were charged 
to the income statement during the year in respect of these schemes. The Group made payments amounting to £24,000 
(31 December 2013: £25,000) in aggregate in respect of certain employees’ individual personal pension plans during the year. 
There were outstanding contributions of £209,000 at the year end (31 December 2013: £128,000).

14. Administrative expenses

Staff costs 

Legal and professional and other services

Information technology costs

Office costs

Provisions 

Other

Note

11

32

2014 
£’000

49,414 

23,527 

8,289 

4,017 

3,605 

12,389 

2013 
£’000

38,424 

12,095 

4,683 

3,191 

2,111 

6,859 

101,241 

67,363 

Included in administrative expenses are £6,014,000 of costs incurred in preparation for an initial public offering.

Information technology costs include £1,628,000 (31 December 2013: £nil) in relation to a write-off of intangible assets.

Included in other administrative expenses are costs relating to temporary staff of £4,534,000 (31 December 2013: £2,322,000), 
travel and subsistence of £2,825,000 (31 December 2013: £2,382,000) and staff recruitment of £2,050,000 (31 December 
2013: £1,197,000).

15. Depreciation and amortisation

Depreciation

Amortisation of intangible assets 

Note

25

24

2014 
£’000

950 

2,951 

3,901 

2013 
£’000

697 

3,125 

3,822 

78

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements16. Profit on ordinary activities before taxation

The profit on ordinary activities is arrived after charging:

Operating lease rentals (including service charges)

– land and buildings

– plant and equipment

Foreign exchange loss
The remuneration of the Group’s external auditors, KPMG LLP, and their associates is as follows:

Fees payable to the Group's auditor for the audit of the annual accounts (excluding VAT)

Fees payable to the Group's auditor for the audit of the accounts of subsidiaries (excluding VAT)

Audit fees
Fees payable to the Group’s auditor and its associates for other services (excluding VAT): 
Audit related assurance services1
Taxation compliance services
Other taxation advisory services2
Corporate finance services3
Other assurance services4
All other services

Non-audit fees

2014 
£’000

1,898 

522 

29 

50 

347 

397 

568 

14 

232 

827 

582 

21 

2,244 
2,641 

2013 
£’000

1,174 

436 

33 

– 

245 

245 

43 

29 

94 

– 

94 

58 

318 
563 

1 

2 

3 

 Audit related assurance services comprise services provided in relation to the IFRS conversion audit and interim profit verifications during the year. Also included is work in relation to the Group’s 
issuance of Additional Tier 1 contingent convertible securities.

 Other taxation advisory services relate to advice provided on a number of specific tax areas arising in the normal course of business. The advice provided also included tax advice relating to the 
Group’s initial public offering.

 Fees payable for corporate finance services for year ended 31 December 2014 include £827,000 for the Reporting Accountants’ reports in relation to the Group’s intended initial public offering. 

4  Other assurance services relate to services provided in relation to the audit of the Group’s results in preparation for its intended initial public offering.

17. Taxation

a) Tax charge/(credit)

Current tax on profits for the year

Over provision in previous periods

Total current tax charge

Deferred tax

Under provision in previous periods

2014 
£’000

15,510 

(157)

15,353 

(3,731)

249 

11,871 

2013 
£’000

2,492 

–

2,492 

(2,506)

– 

(14)

A current tax charge of £16,000 and a deferred tax charge of £182,000 was recognised in other comprehensive income during the 
year ended 31 December 2014 (31 December 2013: £793,000 deferred tax credit) in respect of available for sale debt securities.

79

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

17. Taxation continued

b) Factors affecting tax charge/(credit) for the year
The tax assessed for the year is different to that resulting from applying the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 21.5 per 
cent (31 December 2013: 23.25 per cent). The differences are explained below:

Profit before tax

Tax at 21.5% (2013: 23.25%) thereon

Effects of:

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Prior year deductible temporary differences utilised in the year

Recognition/(release) of deferred tax asset

Over provision in previous period

Deferred tax rate adjustment

2014 
£’000

50,305 

10,816 

689 

–

–

92 

274 

11,871 

2013 
£’000

25,692 

5,973 

(26)

(3,455)

(2,506)

– 

– 

(14)

c) Deferred tax asset
A net deferred tax asset is regarded as recoverable and therefore recognised only when, on the basis of all available evidence, it 
can be regarded as probable that there will be suitable future taxable profits against which the unwinding of the asset can be offset.

Analysis of recognised deferred tax asset:

Year ended 31 December 2014

Capital allowances less than depreciation
Gains on available for sale debt securities recognised through other 
comprehensive income

Other temporary differences

Year ended 31 December 2013

Tax losses carried forward

Capital allowances less than depreciation
Gains on available for sale debt securities recognised through other 
comprehensive income

Other temporary differences

Balance at start 
of the year 
£’000

Recognised 
in income 
statement 
£’000

Recognised 
in other 
comprehensive 
income 
£’000

Balance at end 
of the year 
£’000

3,392 

3,163 

– 

6,555 

(148)

55 

3,299 

– 

318 

3,481 

(182)

– 

(182) 

(330)

373 

6,598 

Balance at start of 
the year 
£’000

Recognised 
in income 
statement 
£’000

Recognised 
in other 
comprehensive 
income 
£’000

Balance at end 
of the year 
£’000

941 

– 

(941)

– 

– 

(941)

3,392 

– 

55 

2,506 

– 

– 

793 

– 

793 

– 

3,392 

(148)

55 

3,299 

Reductions in the UK corporation tax rate from 24 per cent to 23 per cent (effective 1 April 2013) and to 21 per cent (effective from 
1 April 2014) were substantively enacted on 3 July 2012 and 2 July 2013 respectively. A further reduction to 20 per cent (effective 
from 1 April 2015) was also substantively enacted on 2 July 2013. This will reduce the Group’s future current tax charge accordingly. 
The deferred tax assets at 31 December 2014 and 31 December 2013 have been calculated based on the rate of 20 per cent 
substantively enacted at those balance sheet dates.

There were £nil unrecognised deferred tax balances at 31 December 2014 (31 December 2013: £nil).

80

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements18. Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the net profit/(loss) attributable to equity shareholders of the Group by the 
weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year.

Profit attributable to equity shareholders of the Group (£’000)

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue (thousand)

Basic earnings per share (p)

2014

38,434 

2013

25,706

233,658

203,019 

16.4

12.7 

The ordinary shares in issue used in the denominator in the calculation of basic earnings per share are the A1, A2, D and E ordinary 
shares. The B and C ordinary shares are excluded from the calculation on the basis that prior to any initial public offering they have 
no entitlement to dividends or other distributions of the Parent Company.

The calculation of diluted earnings per share has been based on the same profit attributable to equity shareholders of the 
Group as for basic earnings and the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding after the potential dilutive effect 
of outstanding share warrants. The share warrants give the holders the right to subscribe for 2,905,779 E ordinary shares at a 
price of £1.12 per share and a further 1,452,889 E ordinary shares at a price of £1.55 per ordinary share, and are exercisable until 
31 May 2022.

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue (thousand) (basic)
Effect of share warrants in issue
Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue (thousand) (diluted)
Diluted earnings per share (p)

19. Loans and advances to banks

Included in cash and cash equivalents: balances with less than three months 
to maturity at inception

Cash collateral on derivatives placed with banks

Other loans and advances to banks

2014

233,658 
1,967 
235,625 
16.3

2014 
£’000

60,371 

46,162 

10,868 

2013

203,019 
357 
203,376 
12.6

2013 
£’000

226,194 

11,350 

– 

117,401 

237,544 

There were no individual or collective provisions for impairment held against loans and advances to banks. £10,868,000 is 
recoverable more than 12 months after the reporting date (2013: £nil) and relates to cash held by the Group’s securitisation vehicle, 
Oak No.1 PLC.

20. Loans and advances to customers 

Gross loans and advances

less: allowance for impairment losses 

Amounts include:

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

4,823,638 

3,394,872 

(22,574)

(21,028)

4,801,064 

3,373,844 

Expected to be recovered more than 12 months after the reporting date

4,205,825 

2,880,879 

At 31 December 2014, loans and advances to customers of £719.9 million (31 December 2013: £822.9 million) were pre-positioned 
with the Bank of England and HM Treasury Funding for Lending Scheme. These loans and advances were available for use as 
collateral with the Scheme, against which £485.0 million of UK Treasury Bills had been drawn as at the reporting date (31 December 
2013: £485.0 million). 

81

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

20. Loans and advances to customers continued

At 31 December 2014, loans and advances to customers include £293.1 million (31 December 2013: £nil) which have been used in secured 
funding arrangements, resulting in the beneficial interest in these loans being transferred to Oak No. 1 PLC which is a securitisation vehicle 
consolidated into these financial statements. The carrying value of these loans on 10 April 2014 when the beneficial interest was transferred 
was £362.3 million. These loans secured £333.3 million (2013: £nil) of funding for the Group (see Note 33). All the assets pledged are 
retained within the statement of financial position as the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards relating to the loans.

Allowance for impairment losses 

Year ended 31 December 2014

Balance as at 1 January

Impairment loss for the year:

Charge to the income statement

Unwind of discounting

Write-offs net of recoveries

Balance as at 31 December

Year ended 31 December 2013

Balance as at 1 January

Impairment loss for the year

Charge to the income statement

Unwind of discounting

Write-offs net of recoveries

Balance as at 31 December

Individual 
£’000

14,714 

Collective 
£’000

Total 
£’000

6,314 

21,028 

6,373 

(1,025)

(6,015)

3,197 

(984)

– 

9,570 

(2,009)

(6,015)

14,047 

8,527 

22,574 

Individual 
£’000

9,318 

7,689 

(361)

(1,932)

14,714 

Collective 
£’000

Total 
£’000

3,131 

12,449 

3,779 

(596)

– 

6,314 

11,468 

(957)

(1,932)

21,028 

The charge to the Group’s income statement shown in the table above is presented net of releases of provisions previously 
recorded against individual customers. The following table provides a further breakdown of impairment losses:

Provisions established

Less:

Significant provision releases prior to write-off1

Recoveries of amounts previously written off

Charge to the income statement

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

12,758 

12,262 

(2,091)

(1,097)

9,570 

(793)

(1)

11,468 

1  Significant provision releases comprise individual cases where a change in circumstances has resulted in a release of an individually assessed impairment provision in excess of £300,000. 

Finance lease receivables
Loans and advances to customers include the following finance leases of equipment where the Group is the lessor:

Gross investment in finance leases, receivable:

Less than one year

Between one and five years

More than five years

Unearned finance income

Net investment in finance leases

Net investment in finance leases, receivable:

Less than one year

Between one and five years

More than five years

82

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

469,841 

690,359 

16,672 

279,078 

512,398 

19,574 

1,176,872 

811,050 

(130,686) 

(90,852)

1,046,186 

720,198 

376,079 

653,902 

16,205 

235,781 

465,403 

19,014 

1,046,186 

720,198 

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsThe Group enters into finance lease and hire purchase arrangements with customers in a wide range of sectors including plant 
and machinery, cars and commercial vehicles. The accumulated allowance for uncollectible minimum lease payments receivable is 
£2,213,000 (31 December 2013: £2,328,000). 

Due to the nature of the business undertaken, there are no material unguaranteed residual values for any of the finance leases at 
31 December 2014 or 31 December 2013.

Included in the above disclosure is approximately £70 million in relation to block discounting facilities 
(31 December 2013: approximately £52 million) and approximately £17 million in relation to unsecured lending at 31 December 
2014 (31 December 2013: approximately £17 million). 

21. Debt securities

Debt securities designated at fair value through profit or loss:

UK Government Gilts

Supranational Bonds

Available for sale debt securities:

UK Government Gilts and Treasury Bills

Supranational Bonds

Corporate Bonds

Asset-backed securities

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

116,405 

108,399 

37,951 

54,499 

154,356 

162,898 

21,519 

292,965 

24,516 

16,328 

24,647 

90,264 

– 

77,844 

355,328 

192,755 

509,684 

355,653 

At 31 December 2014, £459.1 million (31 December 2013: £301.6 million) of debt securities are expected to be recovered more 
than 12 months after the reporting date. There were no impairment losses in respect of available for sale debt securities.

22. Derivatives held for risk management

Amounts included in the statement of financial position are analysed as follows:

Instrument type

Interest rate (not in hedging relationships)

Interest rate (fair value hedges)

Equity

Foreign exchange

2014 

2013 

Assets 
£’000

1,075 

6,632 

408 

53 

Liabilities 
£’000

23,218 

30,546 

408 

26 

Assets 
£’000

8,484 

– 

354 

34 

Liabilities 
£’000

17,511 

– 

354 

2 

8,168 

54,198 

8,872 

17,867 

All derivatives are held either as fair value hedges qualifying for hedge accounting (from January 2014) or are held for the purpose 
of managing risk exposures arising on the Group’s other financial instruments (all periods). 

Fair value hedges of interest rate risk
From January 2014, the Group has used interest rate swaps within qualifying hedge accounting relationships to manage its 
exposure to changes in the fair values of certain fixed rate lending and savings products and debt securities held, attributable to 
changes in market interest rates.  

Further details regarding the Group’s approach to hedge accounting, including a description of the Group’s exposure to volatility 
are provided in Note 41.

83

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

22. Derivatives held for risk management continued

Other derivatives held for risk management 
The Group uses other derivatives, not designated in qualifying hedge relationships, to manage its exposure to the following:

•  Interest rate risk on certain debt securities held which are designated at fair value through profit or loss;

•  Interest rate basis risk on certain mortgage loans; 

•  Equity market risk on equity linked products offered to depositors; and

•  Foreign exchange risk on currency loans provided to invoice finance customers.

23. Investment in subsidiaries

On 25 September 2014, the 99.9 per cent majority interest in Aldermore Holdings Limited was transferred to Aldermore Group 
PLC, leaving the Bank as a wholly owned subsidiary of Aldermore Group PLC. Subsidiary undertakings, all of which are registered in 
England and operate in the UK, are listed below. All subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements.

Subsidiary undertakings

Aldermore Bank PLC

Securitisation vehicles

Principal activity

Shareholding 
%

Banking and related services

100%

Oak No.1 Mortgage Holdings Limited

Holding company for securitisation vehicle *

Oak No.1 PLC

Securitisation vehicle

Dormant subsidiary undertakings

Aldermore Invoice Finance (Holdings) Limited

Aldermore Invoice Finance Limited

Aldermore Invoice Finance (Oxford) Limited

Subdsidiary undertakings struck-off

Aldermore Holdings Limited

Aldermore Bank Nominees Limited

Base Commercial Mortgages Holdings Limited

Base Commercial Mortgages Limited

Base Commercial Mortgages Funding Limited

Lynchwood Commercial Funding No.1 Limited

Lynchwood Commercial Funding No.2 Limited

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Holding company

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

Dormant

*

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

*  The share capital of these securitisation vehicles is not owned by the Group, but these vehicles are included in the consolidated financial statements as they are controlled by the Group.

An application to strike companies from the register of companies was filed with Companies House on 29 September 2014. Formal strike-off was completed on 3 February 2015.

84

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements24. Intangible assets

Cost/deemed cost at transition to IFRS

1 January 2014

Additions

Write-off

31 December 2014 

1 January 2013

Additions

31 December 2013

Amortisation 

1 January 2014

Charge for the year

31 December 2014

1 January 2013

Charge for the year

31 December 2013

Net book value

31 December 2014

31 December 2013

 Computer 
systems  
 £’000 

 Goodwill  
 £’000 

 Total  
 £’000 

16,253 

4,493 

(1,628)

19,118 

12,898 

3,355 

16,253 

6,249 

2,951 

9,200 

3,124 

3,125 

6,249 

12,653 

–

–

12,653 

12,653 

– 

12,653 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

28,906 

4,493 

(1,628)

31,771 

25,551 

3,355 

28,906 

6,249 

2,951 

9,200 

3,124 

3,125 

6,249 

9,918 

10,004 

12,653 

12,653 

22,571 

22,657 

Goodwill arose on the acquisitions of Base Commercial Mortgages Holdings Limited and Absolute Invoice Finance Holdings 
Limited. For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill is allocated to the Group’s operating divisions. The aggregate amount 
allocated to each division is as follows:

SME Commercial Mortgages

Invoice Finance

2014 
£’000

8,547 

4,106 

2013 
£’000

8,547 

4,106 

12,653 

12,653 

No impairment losses on goodwill were recognised during the year ended 31 December 2014 (31 December 2013: £nil).

The recoverable amounts for SME Commercial Mortgages and Invoice Finance divisions have been calculated based on their value 
in use, determined by discounting the future cash flows to be generated from the continuing use of the division. Value in use at 
31 December 2014 has been determined in a similar manner as at 31 December 2013.

•  Key assumptions used in the calculation of value in use were the following: Cash flows were projected based on past experience, 
actual operating results and the five year business plan (31 December 2013: the four year business plan). Cash flows for a further 
10 year period were extrapolated using a constant growth rate of 3 per cent (31 December 2013: 3 per cent). The forecast period 
is based on the Group’s long term perspective with respect to the operation of these divisions. 

•  Pre-tax discount rates of 13 per cent and 15 per cent (31 December 2013: 13 per cent and 15 per cent) respectively were 

applied in determining the recoverable amounts for the SME Commercial Mortgages and Invoice Finance operating divisions. 
These discount rates were based on the weighted average cost of funding for the divisions based on the Group’s regulatory 
capital requirement and expected market returns for debt and equity funding, adjusted for risk premiums to reflect the systemic 
risk of the individual divisions.

The key assumptions described above may change as economic and market conditions change. The Group estimates that 
reasonably possible changes in these assumptions are not expected to cause the recoverable amount of either division to reduce 
below the carrying amount.

85

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

25. Property, plant and equipment

Cost/deemed cost at transition to IFRS

1 January 2014

Additions

31 December 2014

1 January 2013

Additions

31 December 2013

Depreciation

1 January 2014

Charge for the year

31 December 2014

1 January 2013

Charge for the year

31 December 2013

Net book value

31 December 2014

31 December 2013

 Fixtures, fittings 
and equipment  
 £’000 

 Computer 
hardware  
 £’000 

2,661 

568 

3,229 

1,888 

773 

2,661 

1,357 

396 

1,753 

1,040 

317 

1,357 

1,476 

1,304 

3,078 

339 

3,417 

1,908 

1,170 

3,078 

1,524 

554 

2,078 

1,144 

380 

1,524 

1,339 

1,554 

 Total 
£’000 

5,739 

907 

6,646 

3,796 

1,943 

5,739 

2,881 

950 

3,831 

2,184 

697 

2,881 

2,815 

2,858 

86

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements26. Other assets

Amounts recoverable within one year

Amounts recoverable after one year

27. Prepayments and accrued income

Amounts recoverable within 12 months:

Accrued income

Other prepayments

28. Amounts due to banks

Amounts repayable within 12 months:

Due to banks – repurchase agreements

Due to banks – deposits

Cash collateral received on derivatives

2014 
£’000

3,124 

220 

3,344 

2014 
£’000

2,683 

4,173 

6,856 

2013 
£’000

197 

115 

312 

2013 
£’000

1,810 

3,299 

5,109 

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

304,207 

383,071 

600 

1,100 

1,205 

1,675 

305,907 

385,951 

Collateral given under repurchase agreements
The face value of securities sold under agreements to repurchase at 31 December 2014 was £305 million (31 December 
2013: £385 million) all of which were drawn down from the Bank of England under the terms of the Funding for Lending Scheme. 
The Group conducts these repurchase transactions under the terms of applicable General Master Repurchase Agreement 
guidelines. Consideration received in return for the collateral is recorded as ‘Amounts due to banks’ and is accounted for as a 
financial liability at amortised cost.

29. Customers’ accounts

Amounts repayable within one year

Amounts repayable after one year

30. Other liabilities

Amounts payable within 12 months:

Other taxation and social security costs

Amounts payable to Invoice Finance customers

Trade creditors

Other payables

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

3,438,472 

2,728,364 

1,020,490 

735,654 

4,458,962 

3,464,018 

2014 
£’000

3,813 

10,091 

2,870 

1,860 

2013 
£’000

3,967 

7,146 

848 

2,382 

18,634 

14,343 

87

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

31. Accruals and deferred income

Amounts payable within 12 months:

Accruals

Deferred income

Fee accruals

32. Provisions

1 January 2014

Utilised during the year

Provided during the year

31 December 2014

1 January 2013

Utilised during the year

Provided during the year

31 December 2013

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

18,424 

13,787 

1,971 

712 

1,805 

644 

21,107 

16,236 

 Financial 
Services 
Compensation 
Scheme  
 £’000 

Customer 
redress  
 £’000 

707 

(2,083)

2,606 

1,230 

576 

(1,530)

1,661 

707 

450 

(671)

999 

778 

– 

– 

450 

450

 Total 
£’000 

1,157 

(2,754)

3,605 

2,008 

576 

(1,530)

2,111 

1,157

Financial Services Compensation Scheme (‘FSCS’)
In common with all regulated UK deposit takers, the Group’s principal subsidiary, Aldermore Bank PLC, pays levies to the FSCS to 
enable the FSCS to meet claims against it. The FSCS levy consists of two parts: a management expenses levy and a compensation 
levy, which includes capital and interest levies. The management expenses levy covers the costs of running the scheme and the 
compensation levy covers the amount of compensation the scheme pays, net of any recoveries it makes using the rights that have 
been assigned to it. During 2008 and 2009 claims were triggered against the FSCS in relation to Bradford & Bingley plc., Kaupthing 
Singer & Friedlander Ltd, Heritable Bank plc., Landsbanki Islands hf, London Scottish Bank plc. and Dunfermline Building Society. 
In order to fund the compensation costs of the defaults, the FSCS borrowed £20.4 billion from HM Treasury which is repayable by 
31 March 2016. 

The FSCS provision at 31 December 2014 of £1,230,000 represents interest levies for scheme years 2014/2015. The interest 
levy provisions represent the interest costs on the loans borrowed for HM Treasury for the 12 months ending 31 March 2015. 
The funding rate used is the higher of the 12 month LIBOR plus 100 basis points, and the relevant gilt rate published by the Debt 
Management Office.

The capital levy provision of £nil (31 December 2013: £nil) includes the Group’s estimate of its share of the capital shortfalls on loans 
made to failed institutions by the FSCS. The shortfalls are expected to be recovered by 31 March 2016 when the loans from HM 
Treasury are due for repayment. The capital levy is paid in the same financial year in which it is levied. 

Customer redress
A provision of £999,000 (31 December 2013: £450,000) in relation to Consumer Credit Act (‘CCA’) non-compliance has been 
reflected in the financial statements. The Group has a small number of loans which are regulated under the CCA and has 
identified that, following changes to the CCA in 2008, certain letters and statements have been sent to customers that do not 
fully comply with the requirements prescribed by the CCA. Accordingly, these customers are entitled to redress for interest and 
fees charged on the relevant loans as a result of this technical non-compliance, notwithstanding there is unlikely to have been any 
customer detriment.

88

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements33. Debt securities in issue

Debt securities in issue are repayable from the reporting date in the ordinary course of business as follows: 

In more than one year

2014 
£’000

279,143 

2013 
£’000

–

Debt securities in issue with a principal value of £280.5 million are secured on certain portfolios of variable and fixed rate 
mortgages through the Group’s securitisation vehicle, Oak No. 1 PLC. These notes are redeemable in part from time to time, such 
redemptions being limited to the net capital received from mortgage customers in respect of the underlying assets. There is no 
obligation for the Group to make good any shortfall. Further disclosure relating to the underlying assets is contained in Note 20.

34. Subordinated notes

Subordinated notes

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

36,758 

35,571 

During 2012 the Group issued £40 million subordinated 12.875 per cent loan notes, repayable in 2022, with an option for the 
Group to redeem early after five years. The interest rate is fixed until May 2017. The loan notes were issued at a discount, and are 
carried in the balance sheet at amortised cost using the EIR of 18.597 per cent. In addition to the loan notes, a warrant was issued 
by the Group’s Parent Company, Aldermore Group PLC. The warrant was valued at £2,200,000, and this was treated as a warrant 
reserve within equity in accordance with the accounting policy in Note 2 f(iii).

35. Share capital

Type

A1 ordinary shares of £0.10 each

A2 ordinary shares of £0.10 each

B ordinary shares of £0.10 each

C ordinary shares of £0.0001 each

D ordinary shares of £0.10 each

E ordinary shares of £0.10 each

Rights of class of share:

Type

A1 ordinary shares of £0.10 each

A2 ordinary shares of £0.10 each

B ordinary shares of £0.10 each

C ordinary shares of £0.0001 each

D ordinary shares of £0.10 each

E ordinary shares of £0.10 each

2014 
£

2013 
£

3,569,400 

3,569,400 

5,870,427 

5,870,427 

385,463 

385,463 

13,200 

12,845 

5,440,522 

5,440,522 

8,458,428 

8,458,428 

23,737,440 23,737,085 

Full voting 
rights 

Dividend 
rights 

Distribution 
rights in the 
event of a sale 
or wind-up 

3

3

7

7

7

7

3

3

7

7

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

During the year ended 31 December 2014, 7,815,867 C ordinary shares with a total nominal value of £781 were issued for £781. 

During the year ended 31 December 2014, 4,260,960 (31 December 2013: 1,361,031) C ordinary shares with a nominal value of £426 
(31 December 2013: £136) were repurchased. These shares were subsequently cancelled creating a capital contribution reserve.

During the year ended 31 December 2013, 38,196,551 E ordinary shares with a nominal value of £3,819,656 were issued for 
£64,138,380. A total of £59,344,711 share premium was recognised on these issues, net of capital raising costs.

89

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

35. Share capital continued

Share premium
On 21 September 2014 AC Acquisitions Limited reduced its share premium by special resolution from £237,305,000 to £nil. 
This amount has been transferred to retained earnings. AC Acquisitions Limited was re-registered on 30 September 2014 as 
Aldermore Group PLC.

Share based payments
The Employee Share Programme allows employees (including senior executives) of the Group to receive remuneration in the 
form of share based payment transactions, whereby employees can purchase equity instruments in Aldermore Group PLC. 
The consideration paid for the equity instruments was in some cases below the fair value at the transaction date. The grant date 
fair value of share based payment awards granted is recognised as an employee expense in the Group with a corresponding 
increase in equity over the period in which the performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled, ending on the date on which the 
employees become fully entitled to the award.

The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of awards for which the related service and non-
market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised as an expense is based on the 
number of awards that meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at the vesting date. For share based 
payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the share based payment is measured to reflect such 
conditions and there is no true up for differences between expected and actual outcomes.

The consolidated charge reflects that recognised at a subsidiary level with the corresponding credit going to equity.

The following classes of shares have been granted to employees and Directors of the Group. For shares issued below fair value, the 
difference between fair value and price paid is charged to the income statement by the employing entity over the relevant service 
period over which the benefits of the awards are received.

Year ended 31 December 2014

B ordinary shares of £0.10 each

C ordinary shares of £0.0001 each

Year ended 31 December 2013

B ordinary shares of £0.10 each

C ordinary shares of £0.0001 each

E ordinary shares of £0.10 each

Number of 
shares granted

Weighted 
average fair 
value at grant 
date

455,021 

£1.21

36,182,667 

£0.0018

Number of 
shares granted

Weighted 
average fair 
value at grant 
date

303,347 

£0.52

– 

– 

171,027 

£1.31

The value from the shares is expected to be derived on a form of exit. However, the Articles of Association stipulate that in the event of 
an employee leaving the Group, the shares are immediately transferred back to the Company’s custody with an amount paid back to 
the leaver depending on the conditions of leaving.

The fair value of services received in return for shares granted is measured by reference to the fair value of shares granted. The fair 
value of the shares granted during 2014 and 2013 was based on contemporaneous transactions between unconnected parties in the 
same, or similar, shares, with adjustments made to take account of the different rights, including dividend rights. The charge in the 
Group’s income statement for the year ended 31 December 2014 in relation to all share based payment transactions was £609,000 
(31 December 2013: £162,000).

36. Contingent convertible securities 

On 9 December 2014, the Company issued £75 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Contingent 
Convertible Securities (the ‘Securities’). Net proceeds arising from the issuance, after deducting issuance costs totalled 
£73,657,000.

The Securities are perpetual and have no fixed redemption date. Redemption of the Securities is at the option of the Company on 
30 April 2020 and annually thereafter. The Securities bear interest at an initial rate of 11.875 per cent p.a. until 30 April 2020 and 
thereafter at the relevant Reset Interest Rate as provided in the Information Memorandum. Interest is payable on the securities 
annually in arrears on each interest payment date commencing 30 April 2015 and is non-cumulative. The Borrower has the full 
discretion to cancel any interest scheduled to be paid on the Securities.

The Securities are convertible into ordinary shares of the Company in the event of the Group’s Common Equity Tier 1 ratio falling 
below 7 per cent.

90

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsAs the Securities contain no obligation on the Company to make payments of principal or interest they have been classified as 
equity instruments as required by IAS 32. Accordingly the Securities have been included in equity at the fair value of the proceeds 
received less any direct costs attributable to the issue of the Securities. Any interest paid on the Securities will be a distribution 
to holders of equity instruments and shall be recognised directly in equity on the payment date. Although there are number 
of additional terms relating to events such as acquisition and wind up, there are no circumstances in which the Group has an 
unavoidable obligation to issue a variable number of its own shares.

The Group has not separated any embedded derivative features because the Group has an accounting policy not to separate a 
feature that has already been considered in determining that the entire issue is a non-derivative equity instrument.

The classification of the Securities is considered a critical judgement. See Note 3 (d).

37. Statement of cash flows

a) Adjustments for non-cash items and other adjustments included within the income statement
2014 
£’000

Depreciation and amortisation

Write-off of intangible assets

Amortisation of securitisation issuance cost

Discount accretion on subordinated notes

Impairment losses on loans and advances

Unwind of discounting

Write-off net of recoveries

Net (gain)/loss on debt securities designated at fair value through profit or loss

Gains on hedged available for sale debt securities recognised in profit or loss

Net (gain) on disposal of available for sale debt securities

Interest expense on subordinated notes

Interest income on debt securities

Interest expense on debt securities in issue

Equity settled share based payment charge

b) (Increase)/decrease in operating assets

Loans and advances to customers

Loans and advances to banks

Derivative financial instruments 

Fair value adjustments for portfolio hedged risk

Other operating assets

c) Increase in operating liabilities

Amounts due to banks

Customers' accounts

Derivative financial instruments

Fair value adjustments for portfolio hedged risk

Other operating liabilities

2013 
£’000

3,822 

– 

–

971 

11,468 

(957)

(1,932)

10,716 

– 

(1,869)

5,150 

(9,529)

– 

162 

3,901 

1,628 

431 

1,158 

9,570 

(2,009)

(6,015)

(9,537)

(4,068)

(2,465)

5,179 

(10,655)

2,851 

609 

(9,422)

18,002 

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

(1,428,766)

(1,325,863)

(45,680)

704 

(7,175)

(6,870)

10,480 

1,390 

– 

(6,859)

(1,487,787)

(1,320,852)

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

(80,044)

270,872 

994,944 

1,302,369 

36,331 

1,528 

10,013 

(13,745)

– 

12,431 

962,772 

1,571,927 

91

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

37. Statement of cash flows continued

d) Cash and cash equivalents
For the purpose of the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on demand and overnight deposits 
classified as cash and balances at central banks (unless restricted) and balances within loans and advances to banks. The following 
balances have been identified as being cash and cash equivalents.

Excluded balances comprise minimum balances required to be held at the Bank of England as they are not readily convertible 
to cash in hand or demand deposits. Cash and cash equivalents as at 31 December 2014 exclude £10.9 million held by the 
securitisation vehicle, Oak No.1 PLC, which is not available to the other members of the Group (31 December 2013: £nil).

Cash and balances at central banks

Less excluded balances

Loans and advances to banks

2014 
£’000

79,567 

(5,919)

60,371 

2013 
£’000

192,844 

(3,828)

226,194 

134,019 

415,210 

38. Commitments and contingencies

At 31 December 2014 the Group had undrawn commitments to lend of £404.6 million (31 December 2013: £343.7 million). 
These relate mostly to irrevocable lines of credit granted to customers.

At the end of the reporting period, the future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases are payable 
as follows:

Land and buildings

In less than one year

Between one and five years

More than five years

Equipment

In less than one year

Between one and five years

2014 
£’000

1,545 

2,942 

544 

5,031 

2014 
£’000

180 

267 

447 

2013 
£’000

1,201 

3,319 

1,123 

5,643 

2013 
£’000

140 

14 

154 

At 31 December 2014 the majority of operating leases for equipment related to 49 cars that the Group held under lease 
(31 December 2013: 64). The majority of these leases are due to expire in 2017.

Legislation
As a financial services Group, Aldermore Group PLC is subject to extensive and comprehensive regulation. The Group must 
comply with numerous laws and regulations, including the Consumer Credit Act, which significantly affect the way it does business. 
Whilst the Group believes there are no unidentified areas of failure to comply with these laws and regulations which would have a 
material impact on the financial statements, there can be no guarantee that all issues have been identified.

Working Time Directive
A recent ruling by the European Court of Justice indicated that under the European Working Time Directive, ‘normal pay’ for 
the purposes of calculating statutory holiday pay, includes contractual commission rather than being limited to basic salary. A UK 
Employment Tribunal is now considering the implications for UK employers under the Working Time Regulations 1998.

Meanwhile, the UK Employment Tribunal has ruled that non-guaranteed overtime payments should be included for the purposes of 
calculating how much holiday pay a worker should receive. It is therefore expected that the UK Employment Tribunal will conclude 
on a similar basis for certain commissions.

Based on information and advice to date, the Group does not expect the impact of either the non-guaranteed overtime payments 
or commissions to be material; however, in the event that analysis, judgements and/or appeals are determined to ultimately be 
different, the Group expects the likely impact to be immaterial.

92

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements39. Related parties

a) Controlling parties
The Group is controlled by AnaCap Financial Partners, II L.P. (52.3 per cent. of voting rights) and AnaCap Financial Partners, L.P. 
(47.7 per cent. of voting rights) who are the sole voting shareholders of Aldermore Group PLC. The following agreements are in 
place with a company under their control:

•  The Group provides £5 million of block discounting facilities to Syscap Limited, a provider of business finance solutions. 

The facilities are secured by underlying receivables of short term loans, primarily to solicitors’ practices which are funded at a 
discount to the face value of the loans. The facilities contain appropriate conditions relating to performance, non-performing deal 
substitution rights and default provisions in line with the Group’s standard commercial policies. Pricing on the facilities is subject 
to normal commercial terms. 

•  During the year ended 31 December 2014, Syscap Limited introduced business of £21.9 million (31 December 

2013: £27.7 million) and received commission of £0.4 million (31 December 2013: £0.3 million) of which £nil is outstanding as at 
31 December 2014 (31 December 2013: £nil).

•  In addition, the Group has been charged investment monitoring fees and capital raising costs by funds related to AnaCap 
Financial Partners L.P. of £150,000 for the year ended 31 December 2014 (31 December 2013: £150,000). The balance 
outstanding at 31 December 2014 is £93,000 (31 December 2013: £195,000).

b) Key management personnel compensation
Until 21 September 2014, key management personnel comprised the Directors of the Group. From 21 September 2014, 
following changes to the Group’s governance structure, key management personnel also comprise the members of the Executive 
Committee. Prior year comparatives consist of Directors of the Group. Details of the compensation paid to key management 
personnel are:

Emoluments

Compensation for loss of office

Group contributions to money purchase scheme

2014 
£’000

 3,366 

 20 

 72 

2013 
£’000

2,747

195

60

 3,458 

3,002

Compensation for loss of office for the year ended 31 December 2014 of £20,000 (31 December 2013: £195,000) relates to two 
key persons (31 December 2013: two key persons) and includes a £nil (31 December 2013: £nil) pension plan contribution.

In addition, in the prior year, the Group’s controlling party repurchased key persons shares in the Company for an amount which 
was £94,000 in excess of the initial purchase price.

The Group made payments of £24,000 in aggregate in respect of two key persons personal pension plans during the year ended 
31 December 2014 (31 December 2013: £25,000, two key persons).

During the year ended 31 December 2014, one key person was given the option to purchase B ordinary shares of £0.10 and three 
key persons were given the option to purchase C ordinary shares of £0.0001 in Aldermore Group PLC, at a discount to market 
value. 455,021 discounted B ordinary shares were purchased and 26,250,206 discounted C ordinary shares were purchased 
(31 December 2013: one key person, 303,347 B ordinary shares). 

Key persons’ emoluments includes £nil of deferred bonus (31 December 2013: £nil).

93

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

39. Related parties continued

c) Transactions with key management personnel
The aggregate value of transactions and outstanding balances related to key management personnel (as defined by IAS 24 Related 
Party Disclosure) were as follows:

Loans

Deposits 

Loans

Deposits 

Loans

Deposits 

Transaction values 
for the year ended

31 December 
2014 
£’000

31 December 
2013 
£’000

33 

2,015 

2 

1,570 

Maximum balance 
for the year ended 

31 December 
2014 
£’000

31 December 
2013 
£’000

162 

1,565 

115 

1,862 

Balance outstanding as at

31 December 
2014 
£’000

31 December 
2013 
£’000

162 

1,565 

115 

1,067 

The table above includes transactions and balances relating to key management personnel in post at the end of the year. 
Interest rates charged on loan balances outstanding from related parties are lower than the rates that would be charged in arm’s 
length transactions. During the year ended 31 December 2014 interest was charged on these loans at an annual rate of 0.8 per 
cent above one month LIBOR. These loan balances are not secured. All deposit arrangements have been operated by the Group 
on commercial terms and conditions. 

40. Financial instruments and fair values

The following tables summarise the classification and carrying amounts of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities:

31 December 2014

Cash and balances at central banks

Loans and advances to banks

Debt securities

Derivatives held for risk management
Fair value adjustment for portfolio 
hedged risk

Loans and 
receivables 
£’000

79,567 

117,401 

– 

– 

– 

Loans and advances to customers

4,801,064 

1,298 

Other assets

Total financial assets

Amounts due to banks

Customers’ accounts

Derivatives held for risk management
Fair value adjustment for portfolio 
hedged risk

Other liabilities

Debt securities in issue

Subordinated notes

Total financial liabilities

94

Designated at 
fair value 
through profit 
or loss 
£’000

Fair value 
through profit 
or loss 
(required) 
£’000

Available 
for sale 
£’000

Fair value 
hedges 
£’000

Liabilities at 
amortised 
cost 
£’000

– 

– 

– 

– 

355,328 

154,356 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

8,168 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

7,175 

– 

– 

Total 
£’000

79,567 

117,401 

509,684 

8,168 

7,175 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–  4,801,064 

– 

1,298 

–  5,524,357 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

305,907 

305,907 

–  4,458,962  4,458,962 

54,198 

– 

1,528 

– 

– 

54,198 

1,528 

– 

– 

– 

14,778 

14,778 

279,143 

279,143 

36,758 

36,758 

– 

– 

– 

– 

54,198 

1,528  5,095,548  5,151,274 

4,999,330 

355,328 

154,356 

8,168 

7,175 

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements31 December 2013

Cash and balances at central banks

Loans and advances to banks

Debt securities

Derivatives held for risk management

Loans and 
receivables 
£’000

192,844 

237,544 

– 

– 

Loans and advances to customers

3,373,844 

Designated at 
fair value 
through profit 
or loss 
£’000

Fair value 
through profit 
or loss 
(required) 
£’000

Available 
for sale 
£’000

– 

– 

– 

– 

192,755 

162,898 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

8,872 

– 

– 

Other assets

Total financial assets

Amounts due to banks

Customers’ accounts

Derivatives held for risk management

Other liabilities

Subordinated notes

Total financial liabilities

159 

3,804,391 

192,755 

162,898 

8,872 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

17,867 

– 

– 

Fair value 
hedges 
£’000

Liabilities at 
amortised cost 
£’000

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Total 
£’000

192,844 

237,544 

355,653 

8,872 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–  3,373,844 

– 

159 

–  4,168,916 

385,951 

385,951 

–  3,464,018  3,464,018 

– 

– 

– 

– 

10,304 

35,571 

17,867 

10,304 

35,571 

17,867 

–  3,895,844  3,913,711 

The following table summarises the carrying amounts and fair values of those financial assets and liabilities not presented in the 
statement of financial position at fair value:

Cash and balances at central banks

Loans and advances to banks

Loans and advances to customers

Other assets

Total financial assets

Amounts due to banks

Customers’ accounts

Other liabilities

Debt securities in issue

Subordinated notes

Total financial liabilities

2014

2013

Carrying 
value 
£’000

Fair value 
£’000

Carrying  
value 
£’000

Fair value 
£’000

79,567 

79,567 

192,844 

192,844 

117,401 

117,401 

237,544 

237,544 

4,801,064  4,807,766  3,373,844  3,351,249 

1,298 

1,298 

159 

159 

4,999,330  5,006,032  3,804,391  3,781,796 

305,907 

305,907 

385,951 

385,951 

4,458,962  4,469,413  3,464,018  3,473,176 

14,778 

14,778 

10,304 

10,304 

279,143 

281,281 

– 

– 

36,758 

47,930 

35,571 

44,219 

5,095,548  5,119,309  3,895,844  3,913,650 

Key considerations in the calculation of the disclosed fair values for those financial assets carried at amortised cost include the following:

Cash and balances at central banks
These represent amounts with an initial maturity of less than three months and as such their carrying value is considered a reasonable 
approximation of their fair value.

Loans and advances to banks
These represent either amounts with an initial maturity of less than three months or longer term variable rate deposits placed with 
banks, where adjustments to fair value in respect of the credit risk of the counterparty are not considered necessary. Accordingly the 
carrying value of the assets is considered to be not materially different from their fair value.

Loans and advances to customers
For fixed rate lending products the Group has estimated the fair value of the fixed rate interest cash flows by discounting those cash 
flows by the current appropriate market reference rate used for pricing equivalent product plus the credit spread attributable to the 
borrower. For standard variable rate lending products, and fixed rate products when they revert to the Group’s standard variable rate, 
the interest rate on such products is considered equivalent to a current market product rate and as such the Group considers the 
discounted future cash flows of these mortgages to be equal to their carrying value. The fair value estimations do not incorporate 
adjustments for future credit risk, however, incurred loss provisions are deducted from the fair value amounts.

95

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

40. Financial instruments and fair values continued

Other assets and liabilities
These represent short term receivables and payables and as such their carrying value is not considered to be materially different from 
their fair value.

Amounts due to banks
These mainly represent securities sold under agreements to repurchase which were drawn down from the Bank of England under the 
terms of the Funding for Lending Scheme. These transactions are collateralised by UK Government Treasury Bills, which have a low 
susceptibility to credit risk, so adjustments to fair value in respect of the credit risk of the counterparty are not considered necessary. 
Accordingly the carrying value of the liabilities are considered to be not materially different from their fair value.

Customers’ accounts
The fair value of fixed rate customers’ accounts have been determined by discounting estimated future cash flows based on market 
interest rates on equivalent deposits. Customers’ accounts at variable rates are at current market rates and therefore the Group regards 
the fair value to be equal to the carrying value. The estimated fair value of deposits with no stated maturity is the amount repayable 
on demand.

Debt securities in issue
Where securities are actively traded in a recognised market, with readily available and quoted prices, these have been used to value 
the securities. These securities are therefore regarded as having Level 1 fair values.

Subordinated notes
The estimated fair value of the subordinated notes is based on discounted cash flows using interest rates for similar liabilities with 
the same remaining maturity, credit ranking and rating. The calculated fair value takes no account of the warrants issued separately 
to the holders of the subordinated notes, which have been separately accounted for as a capital contribution within equity (see 
Note 34).

The following table provides an analysis of financial assets and liabilities held on the consolidated statement of financial position at fair 
value, grouped into Levels 1 to 3 based on the degree to which the fair value is observable:

31 December 2014

Financial assets:

Derivatives held for risk management

Debt securities:

Asset backed securities

UK Gilts and Supranational bonds

Corporate bonds

Financial liabilities:

Derivatives held for risk management

Level 1 
£’000

Level 2 
£’000

Level 3 
£’000

Total 
£’000

– 

– 

468,840 

24,516 

493,356 

8,168 

16,328 

– 

– 

24,496 

– 

– 

54,198 

54,198 

– 

– 

–

– 

– 

– 

– 

8,168 

16,328 

468,840 

24,516 

517,852 

54,198 

54,198 

Level 1: Fair value determined using quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

Level 2: Fair value determined using directly or indirectly observable inputs other than unadjusted quoted prices included within 
Level 1 that are observable.

Level 3: Fair value determined using one or more significant inputs that are not based on observable market data.

31 December 2013

Financial assets:

Derivatives held for risk management

Debt securities:

Asset backed securities

UK Gilts and Supranational bonds

Financial liabilities:

Derivatives held for risk management

96

Level 1 
£’000

– 

– 

277,809 

277,809 

Level 2 
£’000

8,872 

77,844 

– 

86,716 

– 

– 

17,867 

17,867 

Level 3 
£’000

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Total 
£’000

8,872 

77,844 

277,809 

364,525 

17,867 

17,867 

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsThe fair values of UK Gilts and Supranational bonds are based on quoted bid prices in active markets.

The fair values of asset backed securities are based on prices provided by third party pricing services, but before relying on these 
prices, the Group has obtained an understanding of how the prices were obtained to ensure that each investment is assigned an 
appropriate classification within the fair value hierarchy.

The fair values of derivative assets and liabilities are determined using widely recognised valuation models for determining the fair 
values of common derivative financial instruments such as interest rate swaps that use only observable market data that require little 
management judgement and estimation. Credit value and debt value adjustments have not been applied as the derivative assets 
and liabilities are largely collateralised.

Fair value measurement – financial assets and liabilities held at amortised cost
All the fair values of financial assets and liabilities carried at amortised cost are considered to be Level 2 valuations which are 
determined using directly or indirectly observable inputs other than unadjusted quoted prices, except for debt securities in issue 
which are Level 1 and Loans and advances to customers which are Level 3.

Fair value of transferred assets and associated liabilities
Securitisation vehicle
The beneficial ownership of the loans and advances to customers sold to the securitisation vehicle by the Bank fail the 
derecognition criteria, and consequently, these loans remain on the balance sheet of the seller. The seller therefore recognises 
a deemed loan financial liability on its balance sheet and an equivalent deemed loan asset is held on the securitisation vehicle’s 
balance sheet. The deemed loans are repaid as and when principal repayments are made by customers against these transferred 
loans and advances.

The securitisation vehicle has issued fixed and floating rate notes which are secured on loans and advances to customers. The notes 
are redeemable in part from time to time, such redemptions being limited to the net capital received from mortgagors in respect of 
the underlying assets.

The Group retains substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership. The Group benefits to the extent to which surplus income 
generated by the transferred mortgage portfolios exceeds the administration costs of these mortgages. The Group continues to 
bear the credit risk of these mortgage assets.

The results of the securitisation vehicle listed in Note 23 is consolidated into the results of the Group. The table below shows the 
carrying value and fair value of the assets transferred to the securitisation vehicle and its associated liabilities. The carrying value 
presented below is the carrying amount recorded in the books of the subsidiary company, some of these notes are held internally 
by the Group and as such are not shown in the consolidated statement of financial position of the Group.

31 December 2014

Oak No. 1 PLC

Carrying amount 
of transferred 
assets not 
derecognised 
£’000

Carrying amount 
of associated 
liabilities 
£’000

Fair value of 
transferred 
assets not 
derecognised 
£’000

Fair value of 
associated 
liabilities 
£’000

Net position 
£’000

293,110 

279,143 

295,526 

281,281 

14,245 

In addition to the transferred assets not derecognised, the Group held within Oak No. 1 PLC Loans and advances to banks 
amounting to £18.4 million. This represents amounts of interest and principal already collected from the transferred mortgage 
portfolios which will be required to be distributed to the note holders of Oak No. 1 PLC on the next quarterly repayment date 
in 2015.

41. Risk management

A key component of the Group’s business strategy is the effective management of risk in order to ensure that the Group maintains 
sufficient capital, liquidity and controls at all times, and acts in a reputable way, taking into account the interests of customers, 
regulators and shareholders. 

Given the nature of the activities undertaken, the principal risks that the Group faces are strategic risk, credit risk, capital risk, 
liquidity risk, interest rate risk, market risk, operational risk and conduct risk. The Group has not defined regulatory risk as a single 
category of risk, owing to the broad nature of regulation. Prudential regulatory risks are covered as part of capital risk, liquidity risk 
and operational risk. Conduct regulatory risks are covered under conduct risk. 

The Group’s Risk Management Framework, policies and procedures are subject to ongoing improvement, and are regularly 
reviewed and updated to ensure that they accurately identify the risks that the Group faces in its business activities. In addition, the 
Group continues to invest in and develop its risk management systems and resources to ensure that the risk management function, 
governance and infrastructure are appropriate for the nature, scale and complexity of the business, which has and continues to 
experience growth.

All these risks arise as a result of the Group’s normal operations. The Group does not enter into transactions for speculative 
purposes. The Group uses derivatives such as interest rate swaps to manage interest rate and other market risks. 

97

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

The risk management structure has developed over the current and comparative period presented. In prior periods, the 
governance structure operated primarily at an Aldermore Bank PLC level. Whilst it has continued to operate at the Aldermore Bank 
PLC level during the year ended 31 December 2014, the intention is for the structure to operate equally at the Aldermore Group 
PLC and Aldermore Bank PLC level. The following sections describe the Risk Management Framework and committee structure in 
operation at 31 December 2014. 

A review of the governance structure at an Executive Committee level was performed in December 2014. A number of changes 
were made which became effective from 1 January 2015. Details of the revised structure are provided within the Corporate 
Governance section on page 45.

Further details regarding the Group’s capital management are provided in Note 42.

a) Risk Management Framework
A core objective for the Group is the effective management of risk. The responsibility for identifying and managing the principal 
risks ultimately rests with the Group’s Board of Directors. The Board has ultimate responsibility for setting the Group’s strategy, 
risk appetite and control framework. The Risk Management Framework is outlined below, indicating the relevant governance and 
control structure for each principal risk.

i) Principal risks
The principal risks faced by the Group are listed below:

•  strategic risk – the risks which can affect the Group’s ability to achieve its corporate and strategic objectives;

•  credit risk – the risk of financial loss arising from a borrower or counterparty failing to meet their financial obligations to the Group 

in accordance with agreed terms;

•  capital risk – the risk that the Group has insufficient capital to cover regulatory requirements and growth plans;

•  liquidity risk – the risk that the Group is not able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due, or can do so only at 

excessive cost;

•  interest rate risk – the risk of financial loss through un-hedged or mismatched asset and liability positions sensitive to changes in 

interest rates;

•  market risk – the financial impact from movements in market prices on the value of assets and liabilities;

•  operational risk – the risk of financial loss and/or reputation damage resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, 

people and systems or from external events including financial crime; and

•  conduct risk – the risk of detriment caused to the Groups’ customers due to the inappropriate execution of its business activities 

and processes.

The Risk Management Framework is designed to ensure that each risk is managed, monitored and overseen through a dedicated 
risk-individual committee. Each risk has a defined risk appetite which is controlled through documented policies and frequent 
reporting, and is overseen by a governance process. 

The Group’s Risk Management Framework is outlined below, indicating the relevant governance and control structure for each 
principal risk.

The Risk Management Framework includes the following components: 

•  policy and control documents – the overarching document which sets out the overall appetite and how each principal risk 

is managed;

•  risk reporting – the primary reporting document relating to the risk;

•  stress testing – the primary means to understand how the risk area behaves under stressed conditions, and the implication for 

capital and liquidity resources; and

•  monitoring committees – the principal committee responsible for monitoring risk is the Risk Committee. This is supported by 

further oversight by the Group Risk function, executive committees, other Board level governance committees and internal audit. 

To support the Risk Management Framework, the Group operates a ‘three lines of defence’ model:

•  the first line of defence comes through operational management, who manage risk by operating within approved policies and 

implementing and maintaining appropriate systems and controls that are effective on a daily basis.

•  the second line of defence comprises governance and oversight. Governance and oversight include the monitoring committees 

and the Group Risk function. These functions cover all principal risk areas, such as credit risk, interest rate risk, operational risk and 
liquidity risk. The committee structure is covered in more detail below.

•  the third line of defence is independent assurance checking. This is provided by the Internal Audit function. Assurance reporting 

is provided to the Audit Committee.

98

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsii) Control framework
The control framework operates over each principal risk as described below: 

‘ALCO’ is the Asset and Liability Committee.

Escalation procedures exist which seek to ensure that issues are reported and addressed at the right level. 

Business 
model risk

Group risk oversight

Prudential risks

Conduct 
risks

Principal 
risk

Strategic 
risk

Credit 
risk

Capital 
risk

Liquidity 
risk

Market & 
interest 
rate risk

Operational  
risk

Conduct 
risk

Control 
documents

Risk  
reporting

Business plan 
(strategic 
objectives/ 
financial 
forecast)

Strategic risk 
register & 
financial 
reporting

Stress 
testing

Strategic 
risk stress- 
testing pack 
(also ICAAP)

Credit 
policy

ICAAP

ILAA & 
liquidity 
policy

Interest 
rate policy

Operational 
risk policy 
and key 
risk registers

Conduct 
risk 
policy

Credit 
pack

ALCO & 
capital 
forecast

ALCO & 
treasury 
forecast

ALCO & 
treasury 
forecast

OPCO & 
operational 
risk 
reporting

Conduct 
risk 
reporting

ICAAP

ICAAP

ILAA

ICAAP

ICAAP

ICAAP

Second line 
monitoring 
committee

ExCo 
 (report 
to Board)

Management 
Credit 
Committee 
(report 
to ExCo)

ALCO 
(report 
to ExCo)

ALCO 
(report 
to ExCo)

ALCO 
(report 
to ExCo)

Operating 
Committee 
(report 
to ExCo)

Product 
Committees 
(report to 
ALCO/ 
ExCo)

Additional 
oversight

Board / ExCo / Internal audit oversight

A detailed analysis of all key risks has been considered as part of the capital adequacy assessment and is documented in the 
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’) report, which is approved by the Board. Liquidity risk is individually 
assessed through the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment (‘ILAA’), also approved by the Board. Operational risk is managed 
through the Operational Risk Policy and Key Risks Registers. 

99

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

a) Risk Management Framework continued

iii) Risk oversight, monitoring and reporting
The Group has a Chief Risk Officer (‘CRO’) who is responsible for ensuring each risk is adequately monitored, managed and 
mitigated. Through the Group Risk function, the CRO is responsible for providing assurance to the Board and the Directors that the 
principal risks are adequately managed and that the Group is operating within its risk appetites. 

The below diagram presents the functional focus of the risk department:

Chief Risk Officer

Prudential 
risk 
management

Credit 
risk 
management

Operational 
risk 
management

Compliance

Financial 
crime

Prudential risk management covers liquidity, market and capital risk. Strategic risk is managed collectively by the Board and the 
Executive Committee.

Group Risk is an independent risk management function, and is separate from the operational and sales side of the Group. 
Group Risk is responsible for ensuring that appropriate risk management processes, techniques and controls are in place, and that 
they are sufficiently robust. 

The Group Risk function provides periodic independent reports on risk positions, risk management and performance against the 
risk appetite statements for all principal risks faced by the Group. Risk reports are provided to the Operating Committee, Executive 
Committee, Risk Committee, Audit Committee and Board.

The reporting and oversight process is designed to ensure the committees which form the governance structure are informed and 
aware of the principal risks and that there are adequate controls in place for these risks. Reports are produced on each principal risk 
and the frequency ranges from daily to monthly, according to what is appropriate for the risk. 

100

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsiv) Committee structure
The responsibility for managing the principal risks ultimately rests with the Group’s Board of Directors.

The Group’s committee structure with regard to risk management is outlined below. This structure was in existence as at 
31 December 2014.

 A review of the governance structure at an Executive Committee level was performed in December 2014. A number of changes 
were made which became effective from 1 January 2015. Details of the revised structure are provided within the Corporate 
Governance section on page 45.

The Board

Risk 
Committee*

Audit 
Committee*

Remuneration 
Committee*

Nomination  
Committee*

Chief 
Executive  
Officer

Executive 
Committee**

Operating 
Committee**

Management 
Credit 
Committee**

Asset and 
Liability 
Committee**

Mortgages 
Divisional 
Board***

Commercial 
Finance 
Board***

Savings 
Board***

Asset and 
Liability Product 
and Pricing 
Committee**

*  Non-Executive oversight

**  Executive/Second line oversight

*** First Line

101

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

a) Risk Management Framework continued

Set out below are the details of the Board and principal committees which enable high level controls to be exercised over 
the Group’s activities. The frequency of meetings is detailed below, although these committees will meet more frequently as 
circumstances require. The details provided below represent the operation of each committee as at 31 December 2014.

In the prior period, the risk management structure operated primarily at an Aldermore Bank PLC level. Whilst it has continued to 
operate at the Aldermore Bank PLC level during the year ended 31 December 2014, the intention is for the structure to operate 
equally at the Aldermore Group PLC and Aldermore Bank PLC level.

Committee

The Board

Audit Committee

Risk Committee

Risk focus

The Board is the primary governing body and has ultimate responsibility for setting the Group’s strategy, 
corporate objectives and risk appetite. The strategy and risk appetites take into consideration the 
interests of depositors, borrowers and shareholders. 

The Board defines and approves the level of risk which the Group is willing to accept and is responsible 
for maintaining a sufficient control environment to manage the principal risks. The Board is also 
responsible for ensuring the capital and liquidity resources are adequate to achieve the Group’s 
objectives without taking undue risk. The Board also maintains a close oversight of current and future 
activities, through a combination of monthly board reports including financial results, operational reports, 
budgets and forecasts and reviews of the main risks set out in the ICAAP and ILAA reports.

During 2014, the Audit and Risk Committee separated into two separate committees. The Audit 
Committee is responsible for reviewing the Group’s internal control environment and monitors 
the financial integrity of the financial statements, and involves internal and external auditors in 
that process. It focuses in particular on compliance with accounting policies and ensuring that an 
effective system of internal financial control is maintained.

During 2014, the Audit and Risk Committee separated into two separate committees. The Board has 
delegated responsibility for oversight of the Group’s principal risks to the Risk Committee, which includes 
reviewing the performance against risk appetites and the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls 
and risk management processes. This committee oversees the development, implementation and 
maintenance of the Group’s Risk Management Framework, ensuring that its strategy, principles, policies 
and resources are aligned to the Group’s risk appetite, as well as to regulatory and industry best practices.

Remuneration Committee The Remuneration Committee reviews remuneration matters, employee benefits and performance 

related pay structures for the Group. It is also responsible for considering and determining the 
Group’s remuneration policy and reviewing its adequacy and effectiveness.

Nomination Committee

The Nomination Committee reviews the structure and composition of the Board, succession 
planning and material appointments, in particular Board appointments.

Executive Committee

The Executive Committee takes day-to-day responsibility for the running of the business. The 
Executive Committee implements the strategy and financial plan which is approved at the 
Board and ensures the performance of the business is conducted in accordance with the Board’s 
instructions. The Executive Committee interacts with the Board via the CEO.

Management Credit 
Committee

This committee meets monthly and is responsible for monitoring portfolio performance to ensure it 
remains within the Bank’s credit risk appetite and reviewing and maintaining credit and lending policies. 

Detailed credit reports are produced covering each specific business line. These reports are reviewed 
by the Management Credit Committee and Group Risk. The credit packs report on the quality of 
new lending, credit performance, arrears and non-performing loans and also provides detail on the 
composition of the credit portfolios.

Asset & Liability 
Committee (‘ALCO’)

The Executive Committee has delegated responsibility for managing the Group’s exposure to 
capital, liquidity, interest rate and market risk to the ALCO.

The ALCO meets monthly and ensures that the firm adheres to the market risk, interest rate risk 
and liquidity policies and objectives set down by the Board. It also has responsibility for ensuring 
that the policies that are implemented are adequate to meet prudential and regulatory targets. The 
committee is also responsible for the effective management of the Group’s assets and liabilities and 
the impact on capital and liquidity of future business activity and management actions.

102

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsOperating Committee 
(‘OPCO’)

The Operating Committee reviews IT, operational and compliance matters to ensure appropriate 
systems and controls exist which are able to support the needs of the Group including any projects 
and change programmes.

The committee monitors operational risk, including regulatory, compliance and conduct risk, 
implements the operational risk management policy and reviews operational performance, 
including key risk indicator reports.

Asset and Liability:  
Product and Pricing 
Committee

The committee meets monthly to review, approve and set the pricing for new products proposals, 
and reviews product performance as well as on-going pricing initiatives and strategic directions on 
product launch.

The committee is also responsible for the effective oversight of the Group’s conduct risk processes 
for new products.

Divisional Boards 
(Mortgages, Commercial 
Finance and Savings)

The Divisional Boards meet on a monthly basis and provide a forum for open discussion and 
decisions on key issues affecting the relevant business segment. Specific responsibilities include 
the delivery of strategic objectives, budget formulation and financial delivery, recruitment, 
training, implementing and maintaining effective controls, product review and performance and 
management of conduct risk.

v) Risk appetite
The Risk Management Framework is the means through which risks are identified, assessed, reported and monitored. The Group 
has set a defined risk appetite for each of the principal risks and performance against the risk appetite statements is monitored and 
reported on a regular basis. The risk appetites are set by the Board and implemented by the Executive Committee. The Group Risk 
function is responsible for ensuring the Group operates within the stated risk appetites. 

The risk appetite framework has the following components: 

•  risk appetite statement: the articulation of the level and types of risk that the Group is willing to accept in order to achieve its 

business objectives;

•  risk capacity: the maximum level of risk the Group can assume before breaching constraints determined by regulatory capital and 

liquidity needs;

•  risk limits: quantitative measures that allocate the Group’s aggregate risk appetite statement to individual activities. 

Where possible this includes forward looking measures; and

•  risk profile: the point in time assessment of the Group’s net risk exposure.

The following section provides details of the Group’s risk appetite for each of the principal risks:

Strategic risk appetite
The strategic risk appetite is measured in terms of the deviation against key performance indicators which form part of the Group’s 
business plan. Performance against the strategic risk appetite is measured every quarter and reported to the Risk Committee.

Credit risk appetite
The Group operates a business line individual credit risk appetite, as well as an overall credit risk appetite for its lending 
activities. Expected losses are factored into the budgeting and forecast process and reflect the Group’s expected view of lending 
performance, taking into account recent performance data and the prevailing economic environment.

The Group recognises that actual losses may differ from forecasted or budgeted values. The credit risk appetites are set as an 
upper limit on losses from credit and credit related fraud and so this limit is set above the budgeted value for each business.

Capital risk appetite
Capital Risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital to cover regulatory requirements and/or growth plans. The Group 
maintains sufficient capital to cover regulatory requirements, including any capital planning buffers, and maintains a management 
capital buffer. 

Liquidity risk appetite
The Board has set a liquidity risk appetite which aims to ensure that a prudent level of liquidity is held to cover an unexpected 
liquidity outflow such that the Group will be able to meet its financial commitments during an extended period of stress. 
Additionally, reputational risks are kept low through honouring pipeline commitments expected to complete during a three 
month period. 

103

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

a) Risk Management Framework continued

Market and interest rate risk appetite
The Group aims to minimise interest rate risk and has a policy of matching fixed or variable rate assets with liabilities of a 
comparable interest rate basis, supplemented by derivatives such as interest rate swaps. 

The Group does not seek to take or expose itself to market risk, and does not carry out proprietary trading, although certain liquid 
asset investments which form part of the liquid asset buffer carry mark to market risk which is regularly monitored. 

Operational risk appetite
The Group aims to maintain operational systems and controls and seeks to operate within a defined level of operational risk. 
The operational risk appetite considers risk events, the assessment of internal controls, as well as holding additional capital for 
certain operational risks.

Conduct risk appetite
The Group has a zero appetite for systemic unfair outcomes, which may result in significant detriment to the Group’s customers. 
Systemic unfair outcomes may arise from poor product design, poor sales processes or unacceptable operational practices which 
risk repeated or continual outcomes which are detrimental to customers. 

b) Credit risk
i) Overview
Credit risk is the risk of financial loss arising from a borrower or counterparty failing to meet their financial obligations to the Group 
in accordance with agreed terms. This risk arises from the Group’s lending activities as a result of defaulting mortgage, lease and 
loan contracts and is the most significant risk faced by the Group.

Although credit risk arises from the Group’s loan book it can also arise from off balance sheet activities. The Group does not actively 
trade in financial instruments, other than for liquidity management purposes.

Credit risks associated with lending are managed through the use of detailed lending policies which outline the approach to 
lending, underwriting criteria, credit mandates, concentration limits and product terms. The Group maintains a dynamic approach 
to credit management and aims to take necessary steps if individual issues are identified or if credit performance deteriorates, or is 
expected to deteriorate, due to borrower, economic or sector-specific weaknesses.

The Group seeks to mitigate credit risk by focusing on business sectors where it has specific expertise and through limiting 
concentrated exposures on larger loans, certain sectors and other factors which can represent higher risk. The Group also seeks to 
obtain security cover, and where appropriate, personal guarantees from borrowers.

Due to the retail and SME markets the Group operates in, external rating agency ratings for borrowers are not typically available. 
However, credit risk is assessed through applying a combination of due diligence, reviewing credit reference agency reports, 
reviewing financial information, credit scores and the use of underwriters. 

Group Risk, the Management Credit Committee and Risk Committee have oversight responsibility for credit risk.

ii) Credit exposure
Maximum exposure to credit risk
The following table presents the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk of financial instruments on the balance sheet and 
commitments to lend before taking into account any collateral held or other credit. The maximum exposure to credit risk for loans, 
debt securities, derivatives and other on balance sheet financial instruments is the carrying amount and for loan commitments the 
full amount of any commitment to lend that is irrevocable or is revocable only in response to material adverse change. 

Included in the statement of financial position:

Cash and balances at central banks

Loans and advances to banks

Debt securities

Derivatives held for risk management

Loans and advances to customers

Other assets

Commitments to lend

Gross credit risk exposure

Less: allowance for impairment losses

Net credit risk exposure

104

Note

38

20

2014 
£’000

79,567

117,401

509,684

8,168

2013 
£’000

192,844 

237,544 

355,653 

8,872 

4,823,638

3,394,872 

1,298

159 

5,539,756

4,189,944

404,593

343,652

5,944,349

4,533,596

(22,574)

(21,028)

5,921,775

4,512,568

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsiii) Credit risk management
Credit risk – lending
The Group targets SME and mortgage customers. Credit risk is managed in accordance with lending policies, the risk appetite and 
the Risk Management Framework. Lending policies and performance against risk appetites are reviewed regularly. This section 
provides further detail on the specific areas where the Group is exposed to credit risk.

Residential Mortgages
The Group’s residential mortgage lending focuses on owner occupied residential and buy-to-let mortgage loans. 

All applications are reviewed by an experienced team of underwriters who assess each application. Applications are underwritten in 
accordance with a residential mortgage lending policy and each loan has to undergo an affordability assessment, which takes into 
account the specific circumstances of each borrower. Information is obtained on all loan applications from credit reference agencies 
which provide a detailed insight on the applicant’s credit history and indebtedness, which is reviewed by the underwriters.

The Group aims to take a conservative approach to lending, lending up to a maximum of 85 per cent loan-to-value (‘LTV’) on a 
single dwelling without further guarantees and undertakes a full valuation on all properties which act as security. Valuation reports 
are produced by an experienced panel of qualified external valuers. The Group also offers mortgages with a LTV between 85 per 
cent and 95 per cent via the Help to Buy scheme. This lending has an associated government guarantee which reduces the credit 
risk to the Group. 

The Group does offer limited advice to mortgage borrowers but does not sell payment protection insurance policies.

SME Commercial Mortgages
The Group provides commercial mortgages to businesses who own their own property and to commercial and residential property 
investors. Loans are typically to SMEs and secured on smaller properties, with limits in place for loans over £1.5 million. A team of 
experienced underwriters review all applications.

Properties are individually valued and a detailed report produced to ensure the property represents suitable security. 
Consideration is given to whether the property has an alternate use and/or can be disposed of within a reasonable period in the 
event of default, where the asset acting as security has to be recovered and sold. Valuations are performed by qualified external 
surveyors. The valuation reports also provide commentary on the tenancy/letting of properties where the commercial mortgages 
are connected to an investment property transaction. In-house valuation experts approve the panel of qualified external valuers and 
perform ongoing quality monitoring. 

Affordability assessments are performed on all loans and other forms of security are often obtained, such as a personal guarantee. 

Loans to commercial mortgage customers are secured on properties solely located in the UK, although there are various sectors 
within the UK to which the Group is not currently lending. Concentration risks are monitored and credit exposures are diversified by 
sector and geography. Regular reviews are performed on loans in the portfolio, with particular attention paid to larger exposures.

Property Development 
The Group has a small portfolio of property development loans, which are predominantly for the purpose of building and 
developing residential property. 

Although the UK property sector has shown signs of recovery, the Group continues to be cautious about property development 
financing. The Group has maintained a conservative approach to development lending and developments are regularly inspected 
by the Group and external quantity surveyors. 

Invoice Finance
The invoice financing activity provides working capital finance for SME clients. This activity may also include credit control and 
collection services for clients.

The approval process includes a review of the management, financial and operational strength of the client’s business and careful 
consideration is given to the quality and contractual collectability of the underlying receivables which act as security. Information on 
the business and the individuals behind the business are reviewed and financial and credit information is obtained from external 
credit reference agencies. 

During the term of the facility, in-life monitoring, audits and reconciliations are performed to ensure the risk of fraud and default 
risks associated with client failure are carefully managed. There is significant diversification at the invoice level which heavily 
mitigates concentration risk.

105

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

b) Credit risk continued

Asset Finance
The asset finance business line originates loan and lease contracts to a diversified range of end users and finances a range of 
assets. Exposures range from public sector organisations to corporates, SMEs and sole traders. Asset finance and leasing to smaller 
businesses can represent a higher risk, although the majority of contracts will have tangible assets acting as security which can be 
recovered and sold in the event of default. 

Expert manual underwriting, supported by data driven by risk management systems and automated decision making is used 
to underwrite credit proposals. Information on the business and the individuals behind the business are carefully reviewed and 
financial and credit information is obtained from external credit reference agencies. Assets which act as security are valued and the 
future resale value of assets is also considered where appropriate. Audits and site visits are used to ensure the Group maintains an 
awareness of the location, use and condition of assets being financed where considered necessary.

At the balance sheet date the Group has nominal direct residual value risk.

Impaired and past due loans 
The table below provides information on the payment due status of loans and advances to customers:

Details of the methodologies and estimates used to determine the allowances for loan impairments are provided in Note 3.

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

Invoice 
Finance 
£’000

Total 
£’000

2014

Neither past due nor individually impaired

2,542,738

994,410

1,039,692

183,324

4,760,164

Past due but not individually impaired

Individually impaired

2013

19,405

6,003

16,061

6,292

7,167

2,614

–

5,932

42,633

20,841

2,568,146

1,016,763

1,049,473

189,256

4,823,638

Neither past due nor individually impaired

1,654,324 

752,387

715,971 

213,749 

3,336,431

Past due but not individually impaired

Individually impaired

23,715 

3,634 

4,733 

9,979 

5,228 

3,238 

– 

7,914 

33,676 

24,765 

1,681,673 

767,099

724,437 

221,663 

3,394,872 

Past due but not individually impaired loans are further analysed as follows:

Past due but not individually impaired

– Up to 2 months past due

– 2 to 3 months past due

Total

Impairment coverage is analysed as follows:

Coverage ratio

Gross Loans and advances

Of which individually impaired

Impaired as a % of gross loans and advances

Allowance for losses – individual provisions

Coverage

106

2014 
£’000

29,989

12,644

42,633

2013 
£’000

27,318 

6,358 

33,676 

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

4,823,638

3,394,872

20,841

0.43%

14,047

24,765

0.73%

14,714

67.40%

59.41%

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsThe credit quality of assets that are neither past due nor individually impaired are internally analysed as follows:

2014

Low risk

Medium risk

High risk

Total

Residential Mortgages

SME Commercial Mortgages

Residential 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Commercial 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Asset 
Finance

Total 
£’000

585,826 1,380,644 1,966,470

257,375

369,693

627,068

59,262

Invoice 
Finance

Total 
£’000

–

341,771

172,479

514,250

113,865

105,938

219,803

839,553

6,502

38,040

23,978

62,018

103,308

44,231

147,539

140,877

176,822

965,637 1,577,101 2,542,738

474,548

519,862

994,410 1,039,692

183,324

Fair value of collateral held

965,559 1,576,914 2,542,473

474,548

519,862

994,410

738,390

181,752

2013

Low risk

Medium risk

High risk

Total

Residential Mortgages

SME Commercial Mortgages

Residential 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Commercial 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Asset 
Finance

Total 
£’000

392,637

965,253 1,357,890

171,859

268,893

440,752

32,160

Invoice 
Finance

Total 
£’000

–

115,445

151,279

266,724

12,400

17,310

29,710

86,927

80,199

87,856

56,653

174,783

579,290

7,388

136,852

104,521

206,361

520,482 1,133,842 1,654,324

338,985

413,402

752,387

715,971

213,749

Fair value of collateral held

520,127 1,132,891 1,653,018

338,985

413,402

752,387

509,456

206,342

The above categorisation is based on internal grading models.

Low medium high grading methodology:
The grading models are used to generate a consistent Group-wide approach for the grading of customer credit risk exposures for 
all lending businesses, and provide a relative internal ranking of risk. Drivers for the grade mapping include external credit reference 
agency risk scores, property valuations and qualitative factors. The relative measure of risk reflects a combined assessment of the 
Probability of Default (‘PD’) by the customer and an assessment of the expected loss in the event of default. 

The probability of default refers to the probability of a customer or counterparty defaulting, which is typically taken as three 
payments past due, within the next 12 months. A default probability model predicts this probability by using credit scores along 
with financial, behavioural and qualitative inputs. 

The main drivers of loss in the event of default i.e. Loss Given Default (‘LGD’) are the propensity to ‘cure’, that is for an account 
to be restored to a performing status, and the level of security held in relation to the credit exposure. The level of security 
varies, ranging from a small number of very short term unsecured loans in the Asset Finance business, to highly secured loans 
on residential property within the Residential Mortgage business. The valuation method for assets is specific to the nature of the 
collateral and includes indexation for property valuations. 

The resulting classification of balances between Low, Medium and High is consequently driven by a combination of the probability 
of default and loss given default grades explained above. A matrix of fifteen PD and ten LGD grades determine the category within 
which each loan is categorised. 

Fair value of collateral methodology:
For Residential and Commercial Mortgages agreements, the fair value of underlying collateral is calculated based on the indexed 
valuation of the property on which the mortgage is secured. Where the balance outstanding is greater than the indexed valuation, 
the fair value of the collateral is capped to the value of the outstanding balance. 

For Asset Finance agreements, the estimated fair value of the collateral is calculated by applying LGDs on a case by case basis. 
The LGD against each loan is deducted from the balance outstanding to derive a proxy for fair value. As the fair value is derived 
using LGDs, the fair value calculated includes an element of prudence as the LGD is based on non-performing loan data. Only a 
small proportion of neither past due nor impaired assets will ultimately default. 

107

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

b) Credit risk continued

Individually impaired balances are further analysed as follows:

2014

Impaired status:

Past due 3 – 6 months

Past due 6 – 12 months

Past due over 12 months

Of which: 
Possessions

2013

Impaired status:

Past due 3 – 6 months

Past due 6 – 12 months

Past due over 12 months

Of which: 
Possessions

Residential Mortgages

SME Commercial Mortgages

Residential 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Commercial 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

1,709

186

1,407

3,302

1,376

1,688

737

276

2,701

3,397

923

1,683

6,003

436

2,891

2,543

5,870

–

1,376

–

74

–

348

422

–

510

2,891

2,891

6,292

Residential Mortgages

SME Commercial Mortgages

Residential 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Commercial 
£’000

Buy-to-Let 
£’000

Total 
£’000

2,479

482

–

2,961

–

279

284

110

673

–

2,758

766

110

3,634

122

1,104

3,382

4,608

2,295

153

2,923

5,371

2,417

1,257

6,305

9,979

–

1,363

–

Asset 
Finance

Total 
£’000

1,837

370

407

2,614

Invoice 
Finance

Total 
£’000

–

3,225

2,707

5,932

Asset 
Finance

Total 
£’000

1,424

654

1,160

3,238

Invoice 
Finance

Total 
£’000

–

4,727

3,187

7,914

–

2,176

–

2,176

280

–

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

3,634

4,090

(1,147)

(59)

 (515)

 6,003

9,979

1,828

(581)

(336)

 (4,598)

6,292

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

1,398

3,370

(597)

(94)

(443)

3,634 

9,184

7,098

(2,828)

(925)

 (2,550)

 9,979

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

3,238

3,517

(630)

(2,190)

 (1,321)

 2,614

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

3,992

1,226

(441)

(767)

 (772)

 3,238

Invoice 
Finance 
£’000

7,914

4,171

–

(4,246)

 (1,907)

 5,932

Invoice 
Finance 
£’000

3,591

4,505

–

(65)

 (117)

7,914

Movement in impaired loans is analysed as follows:

2014

At 1 January 

Classified as impaired during the year 

Transferred from impaired to unimpaired

Amounts written off 

Repayments

At 31 December 

2013

At 1 January 

Classified as impaired during the year 

Transferred from impaired to unimpaired

Amounts written off 

Repayments

At 31 December 

108

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsCollateral held and other enhancements 
The principal indicators used to assess the credit security of performing loans are loan-to-value ratios for commercial and retail 
mortgages. Loan-to-collateral value on indexed origination information on the Group’s residential mortgage portfolio is set 
out below:

Residential Mortgages

100%+

95 – 100%

90 – 95%

85 – 90%

80 – 85%

75 – 80%

70 – 75%

60 – 70%

50 – 60%

0 – 50%

Capital repayment

Interest only

Average Loan to Value percentage – all residential mortgages

Average Loan to Value percentage – buy-to-let residential mortgages

2014 
£’000

9,167

82,454

151,447

82,427

117,888

219,839

370,024

770,682

450,194

310,777

2013 
£’000

39,122

26,378

23,775

20,103

62,875

225,890

421,991

486,067

211,533

161,952

2,564,899

1,679,686

898,008

425,316

1,666,891

1,254,370 

2,564,899

1,679,686

66.84%

64.18%

66.80%

68.19%

Residential Mortgages at a Loan to Value of 90% and above have increased as a result of the Group’s participation in the Help to 
Buy Scheme.

SME Commercial Mortgages
Loan-to-collateral value on indexed origination information on the Group’s commercial mortgage portfolio is set out below:

100%+

95 – 100%

90 – 95%

85 – 90%

80 – 85%

75 – 80%

70 – 75%

60 – 70%

50 – 60%

0 – 50%

Capital repayment

Interest only

Average Loan to Value percentage – all commercial mortgages

Average Loan to Value percentage – buy-to-let

2013 comparatives have been re-presented with a revised split between the LTV bandings.

2014 
£’000

–

–

–

209

2,113

26,522

73,065

204,627

252,420

452,335

2013 
£’000

–

–

–

566

812

21,515

42,474

215,914

264,764

215,953

1,011,291

761,998

478,760

532,531

380,760

381,238 

1,011,291

761,998

52.23%

55.73%

56.82%

60.72%

109

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

b) Credit risk continued

Invoice Finance 
In respect of invoice finance, collateral is provided by the underlying receivables (e.g. trade invoices). As at 31 December 2014, 
the average advance rate against the fair value of sales ledger balances which have been assigned to the Group, net of amounts 
considered to be irrecoverable, is 68.04 per cent (31 December 2013: 69.34 per cent).

In addition to the value of the underlying sales ledger balances, the Group will, wherever possible, obtain additional security before 
offering invoice finance facilities to a client. These include limited personal guarantees from major shareholders, charges over 
personal and other business property, cross guarantees from associated companies and unlimited warranties in the case of frauds. 
These additional forms of security are impracticable to value given their nature.

Asset Finance
In respect of asset finance, collateral is provided by the Group’s rights and/or title to the underlying leased assets, which the Group 
is able to repossess in the event of default. Where appropriate, the Group will also obtain additional security, such as parent 
company or personal guarantees. Asset finance also undertakes a small volume of unsecured lending where it has obtained an 
understanding of the ability of the borrower’s business to generate cash flows to service and repay the facilities provided. As at 
31 December 2014 the total amount of such unsecured lending was £17.4 million. 

Concentration of credit risk
The Group monitors concentration of credit risk by product type, geographic location and sector. Analyses of concentrations are 
shown below. Details of the Group’s lending by product type are as follows:

Finance lease receivables

Invoice financing

SME Commercial Mortgage loans

Residential Mortgage loans

Including:

Value of buy-to-let residential mortgages

Value of buy-to-let commercial mortgages

Credit concentration of assets by size analysed as follows:

2014 
£’000

1,044,298

180,576

1,011,291

2013 
£’000

720,198 

211,962 

761,998

2,564,899

1,679,686 

4,801,064

3,373,844

1,597,255

1,172,213 

401,090

411,262 

2013

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

5,857

46,889

52,634

48,419

83,997

56,632

45,989

156,023

157,566

107,992

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

291,794

155,957

72,116

44,609

55,074

32,528

18,112

37,122

10,459

2,427

2014

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

7,117

64,933

69,861

71,650

114,550

80,233

62,991

190,714

181,727

167,515

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

32,485

548,053

608,382

424,686

479,799

233,269

93,509

132,502

12,214

–

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

460,409

224,912

108,361

59,135

73,556

36,274

21,644

39,988

12,208

7,811

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

24,011

390,316

404,716

271,954

283,193

135,404

66,570

98,180

5,342

–

 2,564,899

 1,011,291

1,044,298

1,679,686 

 761,998

720,198

£0 – £50k

£50 – £100k

£100 – £150k

£150 – £200k

£200 – £300k

£300 – £400k

£400 – £500k

£500k – £1m

£1m – £2m

£2m+

Total 

110

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsAn analysis of the Group’s geographical concentration is shown in the table below:

East Anglia

East Midlands

Greater London

North East

North West

Northern Ireland

Scotland

South East

South West

Wales

West Midlands

Yorkshire and Humberside

An analysis of the Group’s loans and advances to customers by sector is shown in the table below:

Agriculture, hunting and forestry

Construction

Education

Electricity, gas and water supply

Financial intermediation

Health and social work

Hotels and restaurants

Manufacturing

Mining and quarrying

Private households with employed persons

Public administration and defence; compulsory social security

Real estate, renting and business activities

Residential

Transport, storage and communication

Wholesale and retail trade; repair of motor vehicles, motorcycles and personal household goods

2014 
%

9.5

6.3

20.9

1.6

11.9

0.1

4.6

19.5

9.9

3.2

8.2

4.3

2013 
%

8.8 

6.2 

19.2 

1.9 

13.2 

0.1 

4.3 

18.7 

9.9 

3.3 

8.3 

6.1 

100.0

100.0 

2014 
%

1.3

3.2

0.1

0.6

1.4

0.2

0.3

4.8

0.2

0.8

0.1

18.7

61.4

3.9

3.0

2013 
%

0.9 

3.2 

– 

0.6 

1.2 

0.3 

0.4 

5.9 

0.2 

1.0 

0.2 

18.5 

59.1 

4.4 

4.1 

100.0

100.0 

Forbearance
On occasion, borrowers experience financial difficulties which impact their ability to meet mortgage or SME finance obligations. 
Management seeks to identify borrowers who are experiencing financial difficulties as well as contacting borrowers whose loans 
have gone into arrears, consulting with them in order to ascertain the reason for the difficulties, and to establish the best course of 
action that can be taken to bring the account up to date. In certain circumstances where the borrower is experiencing significant 
financial distress, management may use forbearance measures to assist them. These are all considered on a case-by-case basis and 
must be in the best interest of the customer. The forbearance measures are undertaken in order to achieve the best outcome for 
both the customer and the Group by dealing with financial difficulties and arrears at an early stage.

111

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

b) Credit risk continued

The most widely used methods of forbearance are reduced monthly payments, loan term extension, deferral of payment and a 
temporary or permanent transfer to interest only payments to reduce the borrower’s financial pressures. Where the arrangement is 
temporary, borrowers are expected to resume normal payments within six months. Temporary concessions are counted as forborne 
for three months following the end of the concession. Permanent concessions are counted as forborne for 24 months following the 
concession. As at 31 December 2014 and as at 31 December 2013, the Group had undertaken forbearance measures as follows in 
each of its lending divisions:

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

Asset Finance

Capitalisation

Reduced monthly payments

Loan-term extension

Deferred payment

Total Asset Finance

Total forborne as a percentage of the total divisional gross lending book (%)

SME Commercial Mortgages

Temporary or permanent switch to interest only 

Total SME Commercial Mortgages

Total forborne as a percentage of the total divisional gross lending book (%)

Residential Mortgages

Temporary or permanent switch to interest only

Reduced monthly payments

Loan-term extension

Deferred payment

Total Residential Mortgages

Total forborne as a percentage of the total divisional gross lending book (%)

Total forborne

Total capitalisation

Temporary or permanent switch to interest only

Total reduced monthly payments

Total loan-term extension

Total deferred payment

Total forborne

Total forborne as a percentage of the total gross lending book (%)

21

68

162

1,152

1,403

0.13%

3,741

3,741

0.37%

1,661

1,076

11

624

3,372

0.13%

21

5,402

1,144

173

1,776

8,516

0.18%

953

–

482

1,601

3,036

0.42%

7,152

7,152

0.93%

1,842

–

11

90

1,943

0.12%

953

8,994

-

493

1,691

12,131

0.36%

The Group’s total loan balances in forbearance decreased by 30 per cent from £12.1 million as at 31 December 2013 to £8.5 million 
as at 31 December 2014.

112

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsAnalysis of forborne accounts is shown in the tables below:

2014

Neither past due nor impaired

Past due but not impaired

Impaired

2013

Neither past due nor impaired

Past due but not impaired

Impaired

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

1,438

1,225

709

3,372

Residential 
Mortgages 
£’000

1,481

111

351

1,943

2,259

1,482

–

3,741

SME 
Commercial 
Mortgages 
£’000

7,152

–

–

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

1,152

175

76

1,403

Asset 
Finance 
£’000

2,076

960

–

Total 
£’000

4,849

2,882

785

8,516

Total 
£’000

10,709

1,071

351

12,131

7,152

3,036

Credit risk – treasury
Credit risk exists with treasury assets where the Group has acquired securities or placed cash deposits with other financial 
institutions. The credit risk of treasury assets is considered to be relatively low. No assets are held for speculative purposes 
or actively traded. Certain liquid assets are held as part of the Group’s liquidity buffer.

The table below sets out information about the credit quality of financial assets held by treasury:

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

Cash and balances at central banks and Loans and advances to banks
– Rated AAA
– Rated AA+ to AA-
– Rated A+ to A-
– Rated BBB+

Debt securities: UK Government Gilts and Treasury Bills and Supranational Bonds
– Rated AAA
– Rated AA+ to AA-
– Rated A+ to A-
– Rated BBB+
Debt securities: Asset backed securities
– Rated AAA
– Rated AA+ to AA-
– Rated A+ to A-
– Rated BBB+

Derivatives held for risk management purposes
– Rated AAA
– Rated AA+ to AA-
– Rated A+ to A-
– Rated BBB+

As at 31 December 2014 and at 31 December 2013 none of the treasury assets were past due or impaired.

–
79,555
100,043
17,370
196,968

334,927
158,429
–
–

16,328
–
–
–
509,684

– 
689
4,182
3,297
8,168
714,820

–
192,844
237,544
–
430,388

144,794
133,015
– 
–

68,837
8,609
398 
–
355,653

– 
651
8,221
– 
8,872
794,913

113

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

b) Credit risk continued

Cash placements
Credit risk of Group and treasury counterparties is controlled through the counterparty placements policy which limits the maximum 
exposure by entity where the Group can place cash deposits. All institutions need a sufficiently high long term and short term rating 
at inception.

Gilts and Supranational Bonds
As part of the liquidity buffer, the Group holds a portfolio of Gilts and Supranational Bonds. These instruments are AAA or AA+ to 
AA- rated, and typically carry sovereign risk. 

Asset backed securities 
The Group has a portfolio of asset backed securities. The majority of these investments are in AAA or AA+ to AA- rated bonds 
secured on UK originated assets. All investments are in Sterling; no foreign currency bonds were bought. The portfolio has credit 
enhancement, providing principal protection against losses.

Derivatives
Credit risk on derivatives is controlled through a policy of only entering into contracts with a small number of UK credit institutions, 
with a credit rating of at least AA- at inception. Most derivative contracts are collateralised through the receipt/payment of daily 
cash margin calls to cover the mark to market asset/liability.

iv) Offsetting financial assets and liabilities
It is the Group’s policy to enter into master netting and margining agreements with all derivative counterparties. In general, under 
master netting agreements the amounts owed by each counterparty that are due on a single day in respect of all transactions 
outstanding in the same currency under the agreement are aggregated into a single net amount being payable by one party to 
the other. In certain circumstances, for example when a credit event such as a default occurs, all outstanding transactions under the 
agreement are aggregated into a single net amount being payable by one party to the other. In certain circumstances, for example 
when a credit event such as a default occurs, all outstanding transactions under the agreement are terminated.

Under the margining agreements where the Group has a net asset position valued at current market values, in respect of its 
derivatives with a counterparty, then that counterparty will place collateral, usually cash, with the Group in order to cover the 
position. Similarly, the Group will place collateral, usually cash, with the counterparty where it has a net liability position. 

As the Group’s derivatives are under master netting and margining agreements as described above, they do not meet the criteria 
for offsetting in the statement of financial position. 

The following tables detail amounts of financial assets and liabilities subject to offsetting, enforceable master netting agreements 
and similar arrangements including the Funding for Lending Scheme as detailed in Notes 20 and 28. 

Gross amount 
of recognised 
financial 
instrument 
offset in the 
statement of 
financial position  
£’000

Net amount 
of financial 
instruments 
presented in the 
statement of 
financial position 
£’000

Gross amount of 
recognised 
financial 
instruments 
£’000

Related amounts not offset in the 
statement of financial position

Financial 
instruments 
£’000

Cash collateral 
paid /(received) 
£’000

Net 
amount 
£’000

719,900

8,168

728,068

(304,207)

(54,198)

(358,405)

–

–

–

–

–

–

719,900

(304,207)

–

415,693

8,168

(7,068)

728,068

(311,275)

(1,100)

(1,100)

–

415,693

(304,207)

304,207

(54,198)

7,068

(358,405)

311,275

–

46,162

46,162

–

(968)

(968)

2014 
Type of financial instrument

Assets 
Loans and advances to customers 
(amounts pre-positioned as collateral 
under the FLS)

Derivatives held for risk management

Liabilities
Amount due to banks – repurchase 
agreements

Derivatives held for risk management 

114

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statements2013 
Type of financial instrument

Assets 
Loans and advances to customers 
(amounts pre-positioned as collateral 
under the FLS)

Derivatives held for risk management

Liabilities
Amounts due to banks – repurchase 
agreements

Derivatives held for risk management

Gross amount 
of recognised 
financial 
instrument 
offset in the 
statement of 
financial position  
£’000

Net amount 
of financial 
instruments 
presented in the 
statement of 
financial position 
£’000

Gross amount of 
recognised 
financial 
instruments 
£’000

Related amounts not offset in the 
statement of financial position

Financial 
instruments 
£’000

Cash collateral 
paid /(received) 
£’000

Net 
amount 
£’000

822,900 

8,872 

831,772 

(383,071)

(17,867)

(400,938)

–

–

–

–

–

–

822,900 

(383,071)

–

439,829 

8,872 

(6,163)

831,772 

(389,234)

(1,675)

(1,675)

1,034 

440,863 

(383,071)

383,071 

(17,867)

6,163 

(400,938)

389,234 

–

11,350 

11,350 

–

(354)

(354)

c) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group is not able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due, or can do so only at 
excessive cost. 

To protect the Group and its depositors against liquidity risks, the Group maintains a liquidity buffer which is based on the 
Group’s liquidity needs under stressed conditions. The liquidity buffer is monitored on a weekly basis to ensure there are sufficient 
liquid assets at all times to cover cash flow movements and fluctuations in funding and to enable the Group to meet all financial 
obligations and to support anticipated asset growth. 

Through the ILAA process, the Group has assessed the level of liquidity necessary to prudently cover systemic and idiosyncratic 
risks and the ILAA process determines the appropriate liquidity buffer, taking into account the specific nature of the deposit base. 

The ILAA requires the Group to consider all material liquidity risks in detail and the ILAA has documented the Group’s analysis of 
each key liquidity risk driver and set a liquidity risk appetite against each of these drivers. Liquidity risks are specifically considered 
by the ALCO each month. 

Based on the business model of funding primarily via retail and SME deposits, the Board has set a liquidity risk appetite which 
it considers to be appropriate to provide it with the assurance that the relevant liquidity risk drivers should be considered and 
appropriately stressed and that the Group is able to meet liabilities beyond the targeted survival period.

The components of the Group’s liquidity buffer were as follows:

Bank of England reserve account and unencumbered cash and bank balances

UK Gilts and Treasury Bills and Supranational Bonds

Treasury Bills held under the FLS scheme

Covered Bonds

Total liquidity buffer

As a % of funding liabilities

2014 
£’000

104,216

486,225

179,608

4,005

2013 
£’000

390,369 

275,817 

99,784 

–

774,054

765,970

14.87%

19.56%

115

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

c) Liquidity risk continued

Encumbered assets
The Group holds encumbered assets in the form of a reserve bank account with the Bank of England (see Note 37), loans and 
advances to customers secured within the securitisation vehicle and prepositioned under the FLS scheme (see Note 20) and cash 
collateral received from derivative transactions. These balances have been disclosed in the relevant note disclosures. Further details 
of assets encumbered within the Group’s securitisation vehicle are provided in Note 40.

An overview of the Group’s key liquidity risk drivers is provided below:

Deposit funding risk 
The deposit funding risk is the primary liquidity risk driver for the Group and this could occur if there was a concern by depositors 
over the current or future creditworthiness of the Group. Although the Group seeks to operate in such a way as to protect 
depositors, an extremely high proportion of deposits are also protected by the government’s Financial Services Compensation 
Scheme (‘FSCS’). The FSCS provides £85,000 of protection to depositors. 

Wholesale funding
The Group mainly finances its operations through retail and SME deposit taking. It does not have long term wholesale funding lines 
in place with the exception of drawings under the Funding for Lending Scheme, repo facilities to help manage liquid assets, and 
debt securities issued by the Group securitisation vehicle in April 2014. The Group does have relationship banking facilities in place 
which are used to hedge against currency and interest rate exposures as well as repo facilities for short term liquidity management. 

A summary of the Group’s wholesale funding sources is shown below:

Repurchase agreements on drawings under FLS Scheme

Debt securities in issue

Deposits by banks

Note

28

33

28

2014 
£’000

304,207

279,143

600

2013 
£’000

383,071

–

1,205

583,950

384,276

Payments systems
The Group does not form part of the UK payment system. However, in the event there are problems with one of the payment 
systems, the Group has access to other facilities with which to make payments if needed. 

Pipeline loan commitments
The Group needs to maintain liquidity to cover for the outstanding pipeline of loan offers. Although certain pipeline offers may 
not be legally binding, the failure to adhere to an expression of intent to finance a loan contract brings reputation risk, therefore 
liquidity is held for such pipeline offers. 

Cash collateral requirements
The swap Credit Support Annex (‘CSA’) agreement requires the Group or a swap counterparty to hold cash in a deposit account, 
depending on whether the swap is in or out of the money. As the Group is unrated, the swap agreements are not credit rating 
sensitive in relation to the Group, which removes the impact from a downgrade risk.

Contingency funding plan
As a regulated firm, the Group is required to maintain a Contingency Funding Plan (‘CFP’). The plan (which is now part of the 
Group’s Recovery and Resolution Plan (‘RRP’)) involves a two stage process, covering preventative measures and corrective 
measures to be invoked when there is a potential or actual risk to the Group’s liquidity or capital position. The CFP/RRP provides 
a plan for managing a liquidity or capital situation or crisis within the Group, caused by internal events, external events or a 
combination thereof. The plan outlines what actions the Group could take to ensure it complies with the liquidity adequacy rules, 
maintains sufficient capital and operates within its risk appetite and limits, as set and approved by the Board. 

116

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsThe following is an analysis of gross undiscounted contractual cash flows payable under financial liabilities:

Gross contractual cash flows

2014
Non-derivative liabilities
Amounts due to banks
Customers’ accounts 
Other liabilities
Debt securities in issue
Subordinated notes
Unrecognised loan commitments

Payable on 
demand 
£’000

Up to 
3 months 
£’000

3 to 12 
months 
£’000

1 to 5 
years 
£’000

More than 5 
years 
£’000

Total 
£’000

1,142
1,190,398
4,200
–
–
404,593
1,600,333

234,785
809,826
9,479
14,770
–
–
1,068,860

69,910
1,434,729
–
40,651
5,150
–
1,550,440

–
1,090,600
–
240,033
47,725
–
1,378,358

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

305,837
4,525,553
13,679
295,454
52,875
404,593
5,597,991

Derivative liabilities
Derivatives held for risk management  
– settled net
Derivatives held for risk management settled gross:
Amounts received
Amounts paid

542

1,200

10,597

25,029

18,022

55,390

(2,349)
2,349
542

 (4,544)
4,545
1,201

–
–
10,597

–
–
25,029

–
–
18,022

(6,893)
6,894
55,391

2013
Non-derivative liabilities
Amounts due to banks
Customers’ accounts 
Other liabilities
Subordinated notes
Unrecognised loan commitments

1,685
944,724
3,583
–
343,652
1,293,644

174,938
668,323
6,793
–
–
850,054

109,934
1,138,897
–
5,150
–
1,253,981

99,806
775,581
–
52,875
–
928,262

–
–
–
–
–
–

386,363
3,527,525
10,376
58,025
343,652
4,325,941

Derivative liabilities
Derivatives held for risk management  
– settled net
Derivatives held for risk management settled gross:
Amounts received
Amounts paid

–

(13,849)
13,849
–

978

–
–
978

3,179

11,158

3,118

18,433

–
–
3,179

–
–
11,158

–
–
3,118

(13,849)
13,849
18,433

d) Market and interest rate risk
The main market risk faced by the Group is interest rate risk which primarily arises from retail and commercial assets and liabilities, 
liquidity holdings, funding through FLS, debt securities issued by the Group securitisation vehicle and subordinated notes. Interest rate 
risk is the risk of loss through mismatched asset and liability positions sensitive to changes in interest rates. Oversight of interest rate 
risk is covered by ALCO on a monthly basis. Interest rate risk consists of asset-liability gap risk and basis risk.

Asset-liability gap risk
Where possible the Group seeks to match the interest rate structure of assets with liabilities, creating a natural hedge. Where this 
is not possible the Group will enter into interest rate swap transactions to convert the fixed rate exposures on loans and advances, 
customer deposits and available for sale securities into variable three month LIBOR liabilities. 

Given timing differences and the price of hedging small gaps, it is not cost effective to have an absolute match of variable rate 
assets and liabilities. The risk exposure of the overall asset-liability interest rate profile is monitored against approved limits using 
two main measures:
•  Changes to economic value of the balance sheet as a result of 2 per cent shift in the interest yield curve; and 
•  Simulated Value at Risk (‘VaR’).

117

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

41. Risk management continued

d) Market and interest rate risk continued

For each period the risk measures reported were as follows (note: potential losses are shown as negative numbers):

2% shift up of the yield curve:

As at period ended

Average of month end positions reported to ALCO

2% shift down of the yield curve:

As at period ended

Average of month end positions reported to ALCO

Simulated VaR:

As at period ended

Average of month end positions reported to ALCO

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

(323)

(2,274)

(1,086)

2,490

(3,687)

(1,966)

(1,459)

(1,463)

3,206 

1,722 

1,106 

1,652 

Simulated VaR measures the monthly maximum potential gain or loss in the net fair value of interest bearing assets and liabilities 
due to market volatility within a statistical confidence level of 99 per cent. The VaR methodology employed is a Monte Carlo 
simulation based on 30 day average movements in LIBOR. The VaR methodology has inherent limitations in that market volatility 
in the past may not be a reliable predictor of the future, and may not reflect the time required to hedge or dispose of the position, 
hence VaR is not used as the sole measure of risk. The risk measures above are based on the Group’s interest bearing assets and 
liabilities, including the Contingent convertible securities. 

Basis risk
Basis risk is where there is a mismatch in the interest rate reference base for assets and liabilities. When the Group enters into 
derivative contracts to swap fixed rate assets and liabilities into variable rate liabilities, the reference base is usually three month 
LIBOR. Certain lending products have interest rates which are based on the prevailing Bank of England Base Rate (‘BBR’) and this 
different basis reference leads to basis risk. 

The Group has a basis risk policy in place which places limits on the net mismatch between base rate linked assets and liabilities; 
and seeks to manage the overall level of basis risk exposure by entering into basis swap agreements. As at 31 December 2014 
the amount of the basis risk sensitivity measure, as described above, was £480,000 (31 December 2013: £260,000).

Other market risks
The Group does not carry out proprietary trading or hold any positions in assets or equity which are actively traded.

The Group does, however, hold a portfolio of asset backed securities and a portfolio of liquid assets (primary Gilts, Treasury Bills 
and Supranational Bonds) which are used for liquidity buffer purposes. The interest rate risk on these liquid assets is considered 
as part of the asset – liability gap risk described above. The instruments are also exposed to other forms of market risk e.g. 
credit spread risk. Prices are monitored on a day-to-day basis to ensure that the Group is aware of any material diminution in 
value. Formal monthly prices are subject to independent review and are reported to ALCO. The Group has repo facilities in place 
which will be used in the first instance to obtain liquidity when necessary, which will avoid the need to sell the liquidity buffer 
assets and so crystallise any price gain or loss due to market price movements.

Hedge accounting
As detailed above, the Group only uses derivative contracts in order to hedge existing exposures on loans and advances to 
customers, customer deposits and available for sale securities, principally with regard to following the Group’s policies in respect 
of the management of asset-liability gap and basis rate risks. Wherever possible the Group seeks to include the derivatives 
used within hedges which meet the qualification requirements of IAS 39 to be accounted for as fair value portfolio hedges 
(see accounting policy (j) and Note 22). There are however times where, in order to meet IAS 39 requirements for prospective 
testing of hedge effectiveness for new derivatives to be included in hedging portfolios, there is a time lag before IAS 39 hedge 
accounting may commence.

Similarly, there are also certain derivative contracts, e.g. those hedging basis risk exposures (see above) which do not meet 
the criteria for hedge accounting under IAS 39. The gains and losses arising on contracts which do not meet the IAS 39 hedge 
accounting criteria are included within ‘Net (expense)/income from derivatives and other financial instruments at fair value through 
profit or loss’, but as they are not matched by similar adjustments to the economically hedged hedged assets and liabilities they 
give rise to volatility in the income statement which will reverse over the life of the instrument.

118

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsThere is also a portfolio of fixed rate UK Gilts and Supranational Bonds where the pre-existing hedges using interest rate swaps 
did not meet the requirements for hedge accounting on transition to IFRSs and as a consequence the Group used the option 
available within IFRS to designate the bonds at fair value through profit and loss in order to reduce the accounting mismatch with 
the derivatives used to hedge the bonds. Changes in the fair value of the bonds and the hedging derivatives, and any differences 
between them, which are largely attributable to changes in the fair value of the bonds due to changes in their credit risk, are both 
reflected within the income statement as part of ‘Net (expense)/income from derivatives and other financial instruments at fair 
value through profit or loss’.

42. Capital management

The European Union Capital Requirements Directive came into effect on 1 January 2007. This introduced consistent capital 
adequacy standards and an associated supervisory framework in the EU based on the Basel II Accord. This was replaced by Capital 
Requirements Regulation (‘CRR’) and Capital Requirements Directive (together referred to as CRD IV) which came into force on 
1 January 2014 and is enforced in the UK, together with local implementing rules and guidance, by the Prudential Regulation 
Authority (‘PRA’). 

The Group operated under CRD III framework for periods up to 31 December 2013 and under the CRD IV framework from 
1 January 2014. 

As part of the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (‘ICAAP’) applicable to CRD IV firms, the Board is required to 
consider all material risks which the Group faces and determine whether additional capital is required in order to provide 
additional protection to depositors and borrowers and to ensure the Group is sufficiently well capitalised to withstand a severe 
economic downturn. 

The Board manages its internal capital levels for both current and future activities and documents its risk appetite and capital 
requirements during stress scenarios as part of the ICAAP.

The ICAAP represents the aggregated view on risk for the Group and is used by the Board, management and shareholders to 
understand the levels of capital required to be held over the near and medium term and to assess the resilience of the Group 
against failure. The Group submitted its last ICAAP to the PRA in February 2014 and is currently in the process of revising the 
current year ICAAP. It was subject to a Supervisory Review Evaluation Process (‘SREP’) by the PRA. 

The Group is required to maintain a certain level of capital to meet several requirements:

•  to meet minimum regulatory capital requirements;

•  to ensure the Group can meet its objectives, including growth objectives;

•  to ensure the Group can withstand future uncertainty, such as a severe economic downturn; and

•  to provide assurance to depositors, customers, shareholders and other third parties.

The Group presents regular reports on the current and forecasted level of capital, as well as the results of stress scenarios, to the 
ALCO, Board and to the Risk Committee. 

The key assumptions and risk drivers used to create the ICAAP are regularly monitored and reported and any material deviation 
from the forecast and risk profile of the Group would mean the ICAAP would need to be reviewed. 

The Group complied with all externally imposed capital requirements throughout the years ended 31 December 2014 and 2013, 
when its reporting to regulators was based on its books and records maintained under UK GAAP. 

As at 31 December 2014, the Group’s capital base was made up of £354.9 million of Tier 1 capital and £45.3 million of 
Tier 2 capital. Tier 1 capital consisted of fully issued ordinary shares, satisfying all the criteria for a Tier 1 instrument as outlined in 
the CRR, audited/verified reserves, and qualifying Additional Tier 1 capital issued by the Group in December 2014. Tier 2 capital 
relates to issued subordinated loan notes and collective impairment allowances.

119

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the financial statements continued

42. Capital management continued

The Group’s regulatory capital position as at the period end was as follows:

Tier 1 

Share capital

Share premium account

Capital contribution reserve

Warrant reserve

Retained earnings 

Less: Intangible assets

Total common equity Tier 1 capital (CET1)

Additional Tier 1 (AT1)

Additional Tier 1 – contingent convertible securities

Total Tier 1 capital

Tier 2 

Subordinated notes

Collective impairment allowance

Total Tier 2 capital

Total regulatory capital

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

23,737

–

2

2,200

277,879

(22,571)

23,737 

237,305 

2 

2,200 

1,531 

(22,657)

281,247

242,118

73,657

–

354,904

242,118

36,758

8,527

45,285

35,571

6,314 

41,885

400,189

284,003

Both years above are presented on an IFRS basis. The 2013 comparatives were previously reported to the Prudential Regulation 
Authority (‘PRA’) and its predecessor, the Financial Services Authority, based on the Group’s UK GAAP accounts. Regulatory capital 
has increased during 2014 as a result of the issuance of Additional Tier 1 capital in December 2014 and the inclusion of the profit 
for the year in retained earnings. 

The Group has elected to use the standardised approach for credit risk. Under CRD III and CRD IV, the Group must set aside 
capital equal to 8 per cent of its total risk weighted assets to cover its ‘Pillar 1’ capital requirements. The Group must also set aside 
additional ‘Pillar 2’ capital to provide for additional risks. This is calculated by multiplying the Pillar 1 capital by the Individual Capital 
Guidance (‘ICG’) ratio. 

The ICG ratio is based on the various risks which the Group faces and is agreed by the PRA. The Group’s capital base was in excess 
of the minimum required under the ICG.

Further details of the Group’s management of capital are provided in the Pillar III disclosures which are available on the Group’s 
investor relations website: www.investors.aldermore.co.uk.

Reconciliation of equity per statement of financial position to capital resources

Equity per statement of financial position

Regulatory adjustments:

Add: subordinated notes

Add: collective impairment allowance

Less: available for sale reserve

Less: intangible assets

Total regulatory capital

2014 
£’000

2013 
£’000

378,850

265,357 

36,758

8,527

(1,375)

35,571 

6,314 

(582)

(22,571)

(22,657)

400,189

284,003

With effect from 1 January 2015, the available for sale reserve will be included in the Group’s Common Equity Tier 1 capital.

43. Controlling party information

Aldermore Group PLC (the Parent Company) is controlled by AnaCap Financial Partners II, L.P. (52.3 per cent. of voting rights) and 
AnaCap Financial Partners, L.P. (47.7 per cent. of voting rights).

44. Post balance sheet events

There have been no material post balance sheet events. 

120

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsThe Company statement of financial position
As at 31 December 2014

Assets 

Loans and advances to banks

Investment in Group undertakings

Other assets

Total assets

Liabilities

Accruals and deferred income

Total liabilities

Share capital

Share premium account

Contingent convertible securities

Other reserves

Warrant reserve

Retained earnings

Equity

Total liabilities and equity

As at 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

As at 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

Note

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

3

4

6

7

8

8

9

1,368 

2,330 

102 

333,975 

259,116 

197,394 

265 

115 

2 

335,608

261,561

197,498

843

843

744 

744 

–

–

23,737 

23,737 

19,918 

– 

237,305 

177,960 

73,657 

914 

2,200 

234,257 

334,765

335,608

– 

305 

2,200 

(2,730)

– 

141 

2,200 

(2,721)

260,817

261,561

197,498

197,498

These financial statements were approved by the Board and were signed on its behalf by:

Phillip Monks
Director

16 February 2015

Registered number: 06764335 
The notes and information on pages 124 to 126 form part of these financial statements.

121

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportThe Company statement of cash flows
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Cash flows from operating activities

(Loss) before taxation

(Increase)/decrease in operating assets

Increase/(decrease) in operating liabilities

Net cash flows (used in)/generated from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Investment in Group undertakings

Net cash used in investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from issue of shares

Net cash flows from contingent convertible securities

Net cash from financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at start of the year

Movement during the year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year

As at 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

As at 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

Note

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

2

6

7

4

8

9

3

3

(318)

(150)

99 

(369)

(9)

(113)

744 

622 

(74,250)

(74,250)

(61,558) 

(61,558) 

– 

63,164 

73,657 

73,657 

(962)

2,330 

(962)

1,368 

– 

63,164 

2,228 

102 

2,228 

2,330 

– 

586 

(608)

(22)

(689)

(689)

182 

– 

182 

(529)

631 

(529)

102 

122

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsThe Company statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2014

Share 
capital 
£’000

Share 
premium 
account 
£’000

Contingent 
convertible 
securities 
£’000

Share based 
payment 
reserve 
£’000

Capital 
contribution 
reserve 
£’000

Warrant 
reserve 
£’000

Retained 
earnings 
£’000

Total 
£’000

Year ended 31 December 2014 
As at 1 January

Loss for the year

Transactions with equity holders:

– Reduction in share premium

– Issue of contingent convertible securities

– Issue costs

– Share based payments

As at 31 December
Year ended 31 December 2013 
As at 1 January

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with equity holders:

23,737

237,305

–

–

– (237,305)

–

–

–

–

–

–

23,737

–

–

–

–

75,111

(1,454)

–

73,657

19,918

177,960

–

–

–

– Shares issued during the year

3,819

– Premium on share issued during the year

– Issue costs

– Share based payments

As at 31 December

–

–

–

60,319

(974)

–

23,737 237,305

–

–

–

–

–

–

– 

303

–

–

–

–

609

912 

139

–

–

–

–

164

303 

2

–

–

–

–

–

2,200

(2,730) 260,817

–

–

–

–

–

(318)

(318)

237,305

–

–

–

–

75,111

(1,454)

609

2 

2,200 234,257 334,765

2

–

–

–

–

–

2,200

(2,721) 197,498

–

–

–

–

–

(9)

(9)

–

–

–

–

3,819

60,319

(974)

164

2 

2,200 

(2,730) 260,817

In 2014 and in previous years, certain Directors have been given the option to purchase ‘B’ ordinary shares of £0.10 at a discount to 
market value. This gives rise to a reserve of £912,000 (2013: £303,000; 2012: £139,000) which is distributable.

123

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the Company financial statements

1 Basis of preparation

a) Accounting basis
These standalone financial statements for Aldermore Group PLC (‘the Company’) are the first to be prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union (‘IFRSs’). The Company prepared its financial 
statements under United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (‘UK GAAP’) until 31 December 2013. The date of 
transition to IFRS is 1 January 2013. No amendments to accounting and valuation methods were required to transition from UK 
GAAP to IFRS. When preparing these financial statements, management made a number of presentational changes to comply with 
IFRSs. The significant accounting policies adopted are set out in Note 2 to the consolidated financial statements.

b) Going concern
The Directors consider that it is appropriate to continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

c) Income statement
Under Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 the Company is exempt from the requirement to present its own income statement. 

2. Net loss attributable to equity shareholders of the Company

On including the standalone Company financial statements here together with the Group consolidated financial statements, the 
Company is taking advantage of the exemption in Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 not to present its individual income 
statement and related notes that form a part of these financial statements.

Net loss attributable to equity shareholders of the Company

3. Loans and advances to banks

Repayable on demand

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

(318)

(9)

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

–

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

1,368

2,330 

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

102 

There were no collective or individual provisions for impairment against loans and advances to banks. 
All amounts are considered to be cash and cash equivalents.

4. Investment in group undertakings

As at 1 January

Capital injections – share capital

Equity warrants issued

Capital contributions – share based payments

Capital raising costs

Additional Tier 1 perpetual loan

As at 31 December

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

259,116 

197,394 

194,366 

– 

– 

609 

– 

74,250 

61,558 

– 

164 

– 

– 

700 

2,200 

139 

(11)

– 

333,975

259,116

197,394

As at 31 December 2014, £nil worth of investments (31 December 2013: £nil; 1 January 2013: £nil) were classed as impaired.

Investment in subsidiaries
The Company owns 100 per cent of the issued share capital of Aldermore Bank PLC, which is a registered bank. Details of 
subsidiary undertakings of the Bank are provided in Note 23 to the consolidated financial statements.

During the year ended 31 December 2012 a non-returnable capital contribution of £2,200,000 was paid on the issue of share 
warrants. In addition, certain Directors were given the option to purchase ‘B’ ordinary shares of £0.10, at a discount to market value. 
This gave rise to a movement of £139,000.

All the companies listed in Note 23 to the consolidated financial statements are related parties to the Company. See Note 5 for the 
related party disclosures.

124

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsAdditional Tier 1 Perpetual Loan
On 9 December 2014, the Company issued £75 million Fixed Rate Reset Additional Tier 1 Perpetual Subordinated Contingent 
Convertible Securities (the ‘Securities’) as described in Note 36 to the consolidated financial statements.

Also on 9 December 2014, the Company entered into an agreement with Aldermore Bank PLC (the ‘Bank’) for an Additional Tier 1 
Perpetual Loan. The Company agreed a loan to the Bank of £75 million less the sum of £750,000 in respect of certain costs borne 
by the Company in connection with its issue of the Securities. 

The loan is perpetual and has an indefinite duration, is repayable at the option of the Bank, and bears interest at an initial rate 
of 11.875 per cent p.a. until 30 April 2020 and thereafter at the relevant Reset Interest Rate as provided in the loan agreement. 
Interest is payable on the loan annually in arrears on each interest payment date commencing 30 April 2015 and is non-cumulative. 
The Borrower has the full discretion to cancel any interest scheduled to be paid on the loan.

The loan balance is written down to zero and all accrued but unpaid interest and any other amounts payable on the loan are 
cancelled in the event of either the Bank’s or the Group’s Common Equity Tier 1 ratios falling below 7 per cent or if the Securities 
are converted or written down at the request of the Supervisory Authority.

Given its nature the loan has been classified as an investment in a subsidiary undertaking and is carried at cost in accordance with 
IAS 27. Interest on the loan is recognised on payment as that is the point at which the unconditional receipt by the Company 
is established.

5. Related party transactions 

The aggregate value of loans and balances relating to Directors of the Company were as follows:

Transaction value for the year ended

Maximum balance during the period ended

Balance outstanding as at year ended

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

33 

162 

162 

2 

115 

115 

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

n/a

n/a

113 

Interest rates charged on loan balances outstanding from related parties are lower than the rates that would be charged in arm’s 
length transactions. During the year ended 31 December 2014, interest was charged on these loans at a rate of 0.8 per cent above 
one month LIBOR. These loan balances are not secured.

In addition to the above transactions, the Company entered in to an Additional Tier 1 perpetual loan with Aldermore Bank PLC as 
described in Note 4.

6. Other assets

Amounts recoverable within 1 year:

Amounts recoverable after 1 year:

Total other assets

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

65 

200 

265 

– 

115 

115 

2 

– 

2 

Other assets includes £200,000 (31 December 2013: £115,000; 1 January 2013: £ nil) of loans to Group employees.

During the year ended 31 December 2014, Group employees received loans totalling £33,000 (year ended 31 December 
2013: £nil). Interest was charged on these loans at an annual rate of 0.8 per cent above 1 month LIBOR. The loans are made for 
the purpose of enabling the employees to satisfy their personal liabilities in respect of shares issued, and are repayable in 2018.

7. Accruals and deferred income

Amounts payable within 12 months:

Accruals

Year ended 
31 December 
2014 
£’000

Year ended 
31 December 
2013 
£’000

As at 
1 January 
2013 
£’000

843 

843 

744 

744 

– 

– 

125

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes to the Company financial statements continued

8. Share capital

Details of share capital of the Company are provided in Note 35 to the consolidated financial statements.

9. Contingent convertible securities

Details of the contingent convertible securities issued by the Company are provided in Note 36 to the consolidated 
financial statements.

10. Risk management

Through its Risk Management Framework, the Group is responsible for determining its principal risks, and the level of acceptable 
risks, as stipulated in the Group’s risk appetite statement, thus ensuring that there is an adequate system of risk management so 
that the levels of capital and liquidity held are consistent with the risk profile of the business.

The risk management disclosures of the Group on pages 97 to 119 apply to the Company where relevant and therefore no 
additional disclosures are included in this note.

11. Fair values of financial assets and liabilities

The Directors consider that the fair value of its financial assets and liabilities are approximately equal to their carrying value. 
Accordingly no further disclosures in respect of fair values are provided.

12. Controlling party information

Aldermore Group PLC is controlled by AnaCap Financial Partners, II L.P. (52.3 per cent. of voting rights) and AnaCap Financial 
Partners, L.P. (47.7 per cent of voting rights).

13. Post balance sheet events

There are no material post balance sheet events.

14. IFRS reconciliations

The Company previously prepared its primary financial statements under UK GAAP, which differs in certain significant respects 
from IFRSs. There were no amendments to accounting and valuation methods required to transition from UK GAAP to IFRS. 
When preparing these financial statements, management made a number of presentational changes to comply with IFRSs.

126

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsNotes

127

GovernanceFinancial statementsStrategic reportNotes

128

Aldermore Group PLC Annual report and accounts 2014Financial statementsA

l

d

e

r

m

o

r

e

G

r

o

u

p

P

L

C

A

n

n

u

a

l

r

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

a

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

4

Aldermore Group PLC

Registered Office:
Apex Plaza
4th Floor Block D
Forbury Road
Reading
Berkshire
RG1 1AX
United Kingdom

aldermore.co.uk